← Back
Editing: builtin.txt
*builtin.txt* For Vim version 9.1. Last change: 2024 Feb 01 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar Builtin functions *builtin-functions* Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time, the builtin functions are not available then. See |+eval| and |no-eval-feature|. For functions grouped by what they are used for see |function-list|. 1. Overview |builtin-function-list| 2. Details |builtin-function-details| 3. Feature list |feature-list| 4. Matching a pattern in a String |string-match| ============================================================================== 1. Overview *builtin-function-list* Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation. USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~ abs({expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr} acos({expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr} add({object}, {item}) List/Blob append {item} to {object} and({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise AND append({lnum}, {text}) Number append {text} below line {lnum} appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text}) Number append {text} below line {lnum} in buffer {expr} argc([{winid}]) Number number of files in the argument list argidx() Number current index in the argument list arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number argument list id argv({nr} [, {winid}]) String {nr} entry of the argument list argv([-1, {winid}]) List the argument list asin({expr}) Float arc sine of {expr} assert_beeps({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} causes a beep assert_equal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) Number assert {exp} is equal to {act} assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two} [, {msg}]) Number assert file contents are equal assert_exception({error} [, {msg}]) Number assert {error} is in v:exception assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg} [, {lnum} [, {context}]]]]) Number assert {cmd} fails assert_false({actual} [, {msg}]) Number assert {actual} is false assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}]) Number assert {actual} is inside the range assert_match({pat}, {text} [, {msg}]) Number assert {pat} matches {text} assert_nobeep({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} does not cause a beep assert_notequal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) Number assert {exp} is not equal {act} assert_notmatch({pat}, {text} [, {msg}]) Number assert {pat} not matches {text} assert_report({msg}) Number report a test failure assert_true({actual} [, {msg}]) Number assert {actual} is true atan({expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr} atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2} autocmd_add({acmds}) Bool add a list of autocmds and groups autocmd_delete({acmds}) Bool delete a list of autocmds and groups autocmd_get([{opts}]) List return a list of autocmds balloon_gettext() String current text in the balloon balloon_show({expr}) none show {expr} inside the balloon balloon_split({msg}) List split {msg} as used for a balloon blob2list({blob}) List convert {blob} into a list of numbers browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) String put up a file requester browsedir({title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester bufadd({name}) Number add a buffer to the buffer list bufexists({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} exists buflisted({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is listed bufload({buf}) Number load buffer {buf} if not loaded yet bufloaded({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is loaded bufname([{buf}]) String Name of the buffer {buf} bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]]) Number Number of the buffer {buf} bufwinid({buf}) Number window ID of buffer {buf} bufwinnr({buf}) Number window number of buffer {buf} byte2line({byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte} byteidx({expr}, {nr} [, {utf16}]) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr} [, {utf16}]) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) any call {func} with arguments {arglist} ceil({expr}) Float round {expr} up ch_canread({handle}) Number check if there is something to read ch_close({handle}) none close {handle} ch_close_in({handle}) none close in part of {handle} ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) any evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle} ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}]) any evaluate {string} on raw {handle} ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what}) Number get buffer number for {handle}/{what} ch_getjob({channel}) Job get the Job of {channel} ch_info({handle}) String info about channel {handle} ch_log({msg} [, {handle}]) none write {msg} in the channel log file ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}]) none start logging channel activity ch_open({address} [, {options}]) Channel open a channel to {address} ch_read({handle} [, {options}]) String read from {handle} ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}]) Blob read Blob from {handle} ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}]) String read raw from {handle} ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) any send {expr} over JSON {handle} ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) any send {expr} over raw {handle} ch_setoptions({handle}, {options}) none set options for {handle} ch_status({handle} [, {options}]) String status of channel {handle} changenr() Number current change number char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}]) Number ASCII/UTF-8 value of first char in {expr} charclass({string}) Number character class of {string} charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column number of cursor or mark charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc} [, {utf16}]]) Number char index of byte {idx} in {string} chdir({dir}) String change current working directory cindent({lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum} clearmatches([{win}]) none clear all matches col({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column byte index of cursor or mark complete({startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion complete_add({expr}) Number add completion match complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion complete_info([{what}]) Dict get current completion information confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) Number number of choice picked by user copy({expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr} cos({expr}) Float cosine of {expr} cosh({expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr} count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) Number count how many {expr} are in {comp} cscope_connection([{num}, {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) Number checks existence of cscope connection cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off} cursor({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} debugbreak({pid}) Number interrupt process being debugged deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) any make a full copy of {expr} delete({fname} [, {flags}]) Number delete the file or directory {fname} deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}]) Number delete lines from buffer {buf} did_filetype() Number |TRUE| if FileType autocmd event used diff({fromlist}, {tolist} [, {options}]) List diff two Lists of strings diff_filler({lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum} diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col} digraph_get({chars}) String get the |digraph| of {chars} digraph_getlist([{listall}]) List get all |digraph|s digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) Boolean register |digraph| digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) Boolean register multiple |digraph|s echoraw({expr}) none output {expr} as-is empty({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is empty environ() Dict return environment variables err_teapot([{expr}]) none give E418, or E503 if {expr} is |TRUE| escape({string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\' eval({string}) any evaluate {string} into its value eventhandler() Number |TRUE| if inside an event handler executable({expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists execute({command}) String execute {command} and get the output exepath({expr}) String full path of the command {expr} exists({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists exists_compiled({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists at compile time exp({expr}) Float exponential of {expr} expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) any expand special keywords in {expr} expandcmd({string} [, {options}]) String expand {string} like with `:edit` extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1} extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) List/Dict like |extend()| but creates a new List or Dictionary feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer filereadable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a readable file filewritable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a writable file filter({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String remove items from {expr1} where {expr2} is 0 finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) String find directory {name} in {path} findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) String find file {name} in {path} flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) List flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}]) List flatten a copy of {list} float2nr({expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number floor({expr}) Float round {expr} down fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2} fnameescape({fname}) String escape special characters in {fname} fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) String modify file name foldclosed({lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed foldclosedend({lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed foldlevel({lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum} foldtext() String line displayed for closed fold foldtextresult({lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum} foreach({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String for each item in {expr1} call {expr2} foreground() Number bring the Vim window to the foreground fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) String get full command from {name} funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) Funcref reference to function {name} function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) Funcref named reference to function {name} garbagecollect([{atexit}]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references get({list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def} get({dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def} get({func}, {what}) any get property of funcref/partial {func} getbufinfo([{buf}]) List information about buffers getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}]) List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {buf} getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum}) String line {lnum} of buffer {buf} getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}]) any variable {varname} in buffer {buf} getcellwidths() List get character cell width overrides getchangelist([{buf}]) List list of change list items getchar([expr]) Number or String get one character from the user getcharmod() Number modifiers for the last typed character getcharpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. getcharsearch() Dict last character search getcharstr([expr]) String get one character from the user getcmdcompltype() String return the type of the current command-line completion getcmdline() String return the current command-line getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line getcmdscreenpos() Number return cursor screen position in command-line getcmdtype() String return current command-line type getcmdwintype() String return current command-line window type getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}]) List list of cmdline completion matches getcurpos([{winnr}]) List position of the cursor getcursorcharpos([{winnr}]) List character position of the cursor getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) String get the current working directory getenv({name}) String return environment variable getfontname([{name}]) String name of font being used getfperm({fname}) String file permissions of file {fname} getfsize({fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname} getftime({fname}) Number last modification time of file getftype({fname}) String description of type of file {fname} getimstatus() Number |TRUE| if the IME status is active getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) List list of jump list items getline({lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer getline({lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer getloclist({nr}) List list of location list items getloclist({nr}, {what}) Dict get specific location list properties getmarklist([{buf}]) List list of global/local marks getmatches([{win}]) List list of current matches getmousepos() Dict last known mouse position getmouseshape() String current mouse shape name getpid() Number process ID of Vim getpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. getqflist() List list of quickfix items getqflist({what}) Dict get specific quickfix list properties getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]]) String or List contents of a register getreginfo([{regname}]) Dict information about a register getregtype([{regname}]) String type of a register getscriptinfo([{opts}]) List list of sourced scripts gettabinfo([{expr}]) List list of tab pages gettabvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) any variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def} gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}]) any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} gettagstack([{nr}]) Dict get the tag stack of window {nr} gettext({text}) String lookup translation of {text} getwininfo([{winid}]) List list of info about each window getwinpos([{timeout}]) List X and Y coord in pixels of Vim window getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of the Vim window getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of the Vim window getwinvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) any variable {varname} in window {nr} glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) any expand file wildcards in {expr} glob2regpat({expr}) String convert a glob pat into a search pat globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path} has({feature} [, {check}]) Number |TRUE| if feature {feature} supported has_key({dict}, {key}) Number |TRUE| if {dict} has entry {key} haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number |TRUE| if the window executed |:lcd| or |:tcd| hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) Number |TRUE| if mapping to {what} exists histadd({history}, {item}) Number add an item to a history histdel({history} [, {item}]) Number remove an item from a history histget({history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history histnr({history}) Number highest index of a history hlID({name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name} hlexists({name}) Number |TRUE| if highlight group {name} exists hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) List get highlight group attributes hlset({list}) Number set highlight group attributes hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr} indent({lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum} index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) Number index in {object} where {expr} appears indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]]) Number index in {object} where {expr} is true input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) String get input from the user inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) String like input() but in a GUI dialog inputlist({textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list inputrestore() Number restore typeahead inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {object} [before {idx}] instanceof({object}, {class}) Number |TRUE| if {object} is an instance of {class} interrupt() none interrupt script execution invert({expr}) Number bitwise invert isabsolutepath({path}) Number |TRUE| if {path} is an absolute path isdirectory({directory}) Number |TRUE| if {directory} is a directory isinf({expr}) Number determine if {expr} is infinity value (positive or negative) islocked({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is locked isnan({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is NaN items({dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict} job_getchannel({job}) Channel get the channel handle for {job} job_info([{job}]) Dict get information about {job} job_setoptions({job}, {options}) none set options for {job} job_start({command} [, {options}]) Job start a job job_status({job}) String get the status of {job} job_stop({job} [, {how}]) Number stop {job} join({list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String js_decode({string}) any decode JS style JSON js_encode({expr}) String encode JS style JSON json_decode({string}) any decode JSON json_encode({expr}) String encode JSON keys({dict}) List keys in {dict} keytrans({string}) String translate internal keycodes to a form that can be used by |:map| len({expr}) Number the length of {expr} libcall({lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg} libcallnr({lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number line({expr} [, {winid}]) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark line2byte({lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum} lispindent({lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum} list2blob({list}) Blob turn {list} of numbers into a Blob list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) String turn {list} of numbers into a String listener_add({callback} [, {buf}]) Number add a callback to listen to changes listener_flush([{buf}]) none invoke listener callbacks listener_remove({id}) none remove a listener callback localtime() Number current time log({expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} log10({expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) any evaluate |Lua| expression map({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String change each item in {expr1} to {expr2} maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) String or Dict rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode} mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) String check for mappings matching {name} maplist([{abbr}]) List list of all mappings, a dict for each mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String like |map()| but creates a new List or Dictionary mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) none restore mapping from |maparg()| result match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) Number position where {pat} matches in {expr} matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) Number highlight {pattern} with {group} matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) Number highlight positions with {group} matcharg({nr}) List arguments of |:match| matchbufline({buf}, {pat}, {lnum}, {end}, [, {dict}) List all the {pat} matches in buffer {buf} matchdelete({id} [, {win}]) Number delete match identified by {id} matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) Number position where {pat} ends in {expr} matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) List fuzzy match {str} in {list} matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) List fuzzy match {str} in {list} matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr} matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} matchstrlist({list}, {pat} [, {dict}) List all the {pat} matches in {list} matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) List {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} max({expr}) Number maximum value of items in {expr} menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) Dict get menu item information min({expr}) Number minimum value of items in {expr} mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]]) Number create directory {name} mode([expr]) String current editing mode mzeval({expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression nextnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum} nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) String single char with ASCII/UTF-8 value {expr} or({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise OR pathshorten({expr} [, {len}]) String shorten directory names in a path perleval({expr}) any evaluate |Perl| expression popup_atcursor({what}, {options}) Number create popup window near the cursor popup_beval({what}, {options}) Number create popup window for 'ballooneval' popup_clear() none close all popup windows popup_close({id} [, {result}]) none close popup window {id} popup_create({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window popup_dialog({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a dialog popup_filter_menu({id}, {key}) Number filter for a menu popup window popup_filter_yesno({id}, {key}) Number filter for a dialog popup window popup_findecho() Number get window ID of popup for `:echowin` popup_findinfo() Number get window ID of info popup window popup_findpreview() Number get window ID of preview popup window popup_getoptions({id}) Dict get options of popup window {id} popup_getpos({id}) Dict get position of popup window {id} popup_hide({id}) none hide popup menu {id} popup_list() List get a list of window IDs of all popups popup_locate({row}, {col}) Number get window ID of popup at position popup_menu({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a menu popup_move({id}, {options}) none set position of popup window {id} popup_notification({what}, {options}) Number create a notification popup window popup_setoptions({id}, {options}) none set options for popup window {id} popup_settext({id}, {text}) none set the text of popup window {id} popup_show({id}) none unhide popup window {id} pow({x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y} prevnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum} printf({fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text prompt_getprompt({buf}) String get prompt text prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) none set prompt callback function prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt interrupt function prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt text prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props}) none add one text property prop_add_list({props}, [[{lnum}, {col}, {end-lnum}, {end-col}], ...]) none add multiple text properties prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]]) none remove all text properties prop_find({props} [, {direction}]) Dict search for a text property prop_list({lnum} [, {props}]) List text properties in {lnum} prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]]) Number remove a text property prop_type_add({name}, {props}) none define a new property type prop_type_change({name}, {props}) none change an existing property type prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}]) none delete a property type prop_type_get({name} [, {props}]) Dict get property type values prop_type_list([{props}]) List get list of property types pum_getpos() Dict position and size of pum if visible pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible py3eval({expr}) any evaluate |python3| expression pyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Python| expression pyxeval({expr}) any evaluate |python_x| expression rand([{expr}]) Number get pseudo-random number range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) List items from {expr} to {max} readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]]) Blob read a |Blob| from {fname} readdir({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) List file names in {dir} selected by {expr} readdirex({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) List file info in {dir} selected by {expr} readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]]) List get list of lines from file {fname} reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}]) any reduce {object} using {func} reg_executing() String get the executing register name reg_recording() String get the recording register name reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value reltimefloat({time}) Float turn the time value into a Float reltimestr({time}) String turn time value into a String remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]]) String send expression remote_foreground({server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) Number check for reply string remote_read({serverid} [, {timeout}]) String read reply string remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) String send key sequence remote_startserver({name}) none become server {name} remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any/List remove items {idx}-{end} from {list} remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}]) Number/Blob remove bytes {idx}-{end} from {blob} remove({dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict} rename({from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to} repeat({expr}, {count}) List/Blob/String repeat {expr} {count} times resolve({filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to reverse({obj}) List/Blob/String reverse {obj} round({expr}) Float round off {expr} rubyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Ruby| expression screenattr({row}, {col}) Number attribute at screen position screenchar({row}, {col}) Number character at screen position screenchars({row}, {col}) List List of characters at screen position screencol() Number current cursor column screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) Dict screen row and col of a text character screenrow() Number current cursor row screenstring({row}, {col}) String characters at screen position search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) Number search for {pattern} searchcount([{options}]) Dict get or update search stats searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) Number search for variable declaration searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) Number search for other end of start/end pair searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) List search for other end of start/end pair searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) List search for {pattern} server2client({clientid}, {string}) Number send reply string serverlist() String get a list of available servers setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text}) Number set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {expr} setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in buffer {buf} to {val} setcellwidths({list}) none set character cell width overrides setcharpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} setcharsearch({dict}) Dict set character search from {dict} setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) Number set command-line setcmdpos({pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line setcursorcharpos({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} setenv({name}, {val}) none set environment variable setfperm({fname}, {mode}) Number set {fname} file permissions to {mode} setline({lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line} setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) Number modify location list using {list} setloclist({nr}, {list}, {action}, {what}) Number modify specific location list props setmatches({list} [, {win}]) Number restore a list of matches setpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} setqflist({list} [, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list} setqflist({list}, {action}, {what}) Number modify specific quickfix list props setreg({n}, {v} [, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type settabvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val} settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in window {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val} settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}]) Number modify tag stack using {dict} setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in window {nr} to {val} sha256({string}) String SHA256 checksum of {string} shellescape({string} [, {special}]) String escape {string} for use as shell command argument shiftwidth([{col}]) Number effective value of 'shiftwidth' sign_define({name} [, {dict}]) Number define or update a sign sign_define({list}) List define or update a list of signs sign_getdefined([{name}]) List get a list of defined signs sign_getplaced([{buf} [, {dict}]]) List get a list of placed signs sign_jump({id}, {group}, {buf}) Number jump to a sign sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {buf} [, {dict}]) Number place a sign sign_placelist({list}) List place a list of signs sign_undefine([{name}]) Number undefine a sign sign_undefine({list}) List undefine a list of signs sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}]) Number unplace a sign sign_unplacelist({list}) List unplace a list of signs simplify({filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible sin({expr}) Float sine of {expr} sinh({expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr} slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) String, List or Blob slice of a String, List or Blob sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]]) List sort {list}, compare with {how} sound_clear() none stop playing all sounds sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}]) Number play an event sound sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}]) Number play sound file {path} sound_stop({id}) none stop playing sound {id} soundfold({word}) String sound-fold {word} spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) List spelling suggestions split({expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]]) List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr} sqrt({expr}) Float square root of {expr} srand([{expr}]) List get seed for |rand()| state([{what}]) String current state of Vim str2float({expr} [, {quoted}]) Float convert String to Float str2list({expr} [, {utf8}]) List convert each character of {expr} to ASCII/UTF-8 value str2nr({expr} [, {base} [, {quoted}]]) Number convert String to Number strcharlen({expr}) Number character length of the String {expr} strcharpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]]) String {len} characters of {str} at character {start} strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}]) Number character count of the String {expr} strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr} strftime({format} [, {time}]) String format time with a specified format strgetchar({str}, {index}) Number get char {index} from {str} stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) Number index of {needle} in {haystack} string({expr}) String String representation of {expr} value strlen({expr}) Number length of the String {expr} strpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]]) String {len} bytes/chars of {str} at byte {start} strptime({format}, {timestring}) Number Convert {timestring} to unix timestamp strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) Number last index of {needle} in {haystack} strtrans({expr}) String translate string to make it printable strutf16len({string} [, {countcc}]) Number number of UTF-16 code units in {string} strwidth({expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr} submatch({nr} [, {list}]) String or List specific match in ":s" or substitute() substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub} swapfilelist() List swap files found in 'directory' swapinfo({fname}) Dict information about swap file {fname} swapname({buf}) String swap file of buffer {buf} synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col} synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID} synIDtrans({synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID} synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing synstack({lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} system({expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr} systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) List output of shell command/filter {expr} tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page tabpagenr([{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) Number number of current window in tab page tagfiles() List tags files used taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) List list of tags matching {expr} tan({expr}) Float tangent of {expr} tanh({expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr} tempname() String name for a temporary file term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}]) Number display difference between two dumps term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}]) Number displaying a screen dump term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}]) none dump terminal window contents term_getaltscreen({buf}) Number get the alternate screen flag term_getansicolors({buf}) List get ANSI palette in GUI color mode term_getattr({attr}, {what}) Number get the value of attribute {what} term_getcursor({buf}) List get the cursor position of a terminal term_getjob({buf}) Job get the job associated with a terminal term_getline({buf}, {row}) String get a line of text from a terminal term_getscrolled({buf}) Number get the scroll count of a terminal term_getsize({buf}) List get the size of a terminal term_getstatus({buf}) String get the status of a terminal term_gettitle({buf}) String get the title of a terminal term_gettty({buf}, [{input}]) String get the tty name of a terminal term_list() List get the list of terminal buffers term_scrape({buf}, {row}) List get row of a terminal screen term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys}) none send keystrokes to a terminal term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors}) none set ANSI palette in GUI color mode term_setapi({buf}, {expr}) none set |terminal-api| function name prefix term_setkill({buf}, {how}) none set signal to stop job in terminal term_setrestore({buf}, {command}) none set command to restore terminal term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols}) none set the size of a terminal term_start({cmd} [, {options}]) Number open a terminal window and run a job term_wait({buf} [, {time}]) Number wait for screen to be updated terminalprops() Dict properties of the terminal test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat}) none make memory allocation fail test_autochdir() none enable 'autochdir' during startup test_feedinput({string}) none add key sequence to input buffer test_garbagecollect_now() none free memory right now for testing test_garbagecollect_soon() none free memory soon for testing test_getvalue({string}) any get value of an internal variable test_gui_event({event}, {args}) bool generate a GUI event for testing test_ignore_error({expr}) none ignore a specific error test_mswin_event({event}, {args}) bool generate MS-Windows event for testing test_null_blob() Blob null value for testing test_null_channel() Channel null value for testing test_null_dict() Dict null value for testing test_null_function() Funcref null value for testing test_null_job() Job null value for testing test_null_list() List null value for testing test_null_partial() Funcref null value for testing test_null_string() String null value for testing test_option_not_set({name}) none reset flag indicating option was set test_override({expr}, {val}) none test with Vim internal overrides test_refcount({expr}) Number get the reference count of {expr} test_setmouse({row}, {col}) none set the mouse position for testing test_settime({expr}) none set current time for testing test_srand_seed([seed]) none set seed for testing srand() test_unknown() any unknown value for testing test_void() any void value for testing timer_info([{id}]) List information about timers timer_pause({id}, {pause}) none pause or unpause a timer timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}]) Number create a timer timer_stop({timer}) none stop a timer timer_stopall() none stop all timers tolower({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase toupper({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr} to chars in {tostr} trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]]) String trim characters in {mask} from {text} trunc({expr}) Float truncate Float {expr} type({expr}) Number type of value {expr} typename({expr}) String representation of the type of {expr} undofile({name}) String undo file name for {name} undotree([{buf}]) List undo file tree for buffer {buf} uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) List remove adjacent duplicates from a list utf16idx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc} [, {charidx}]]) Number UTF-16 index of byte {idx} in {string} values({dict}) List values in {dict} virtcol({expr} [, {list} [, {winid}]) Number or List screen column of cursor or mark virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) Number byte index of a character on screen visualmode([expr]) String last visual mode used wildmenumode() Number whether 'wildmenu' mode is active win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}]) String execute {command} in window {id} win_findbuf({bufnr}) List find windows containing {bufnr} win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) Number get window ID for {win} in {tab} win_gettype([{nr}]) String type of window {nr} win_gotoid({expr}) Number go to window with ID {expr} win_id2tabwin({expr}) List get tab and window nr from window ID win_id2win({expr}) Number get window nr from window ID win_move_separator({nr}) Number move window vertical separator win_move_statusline({nr}) Number move window status line win_screenpos({nr}) List get screen position of window {nr} win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}]) Number move window {nr} to split of {target} winbufnr({nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr} wincol() Number window column of the cursor windowsversion() String MS-Windows OS version winheight({nr}) Number height of window {nr} winlayout([{tabnr}]) List layout of windows in tab {tabnr} winline() Number window line of the cursor winnr([{expr}]) Number number of current window winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes winrestview({dict}) none restore view of current window winsaveview() Dict save view of current window winwidth({nr}) Number width of window {nr} wordcount() Dict get byte/char/word statistics writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}]) Number write |Blob| or |List| of lines to file xor({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise XOR ============================================================================== 2. Details *builtin-function-details* Not all functions are here, some have been moved to a help file covering the specific functionality. abs({expr}) *abs()* Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise abs() gives an error message and returns -1. Examples: > echo abs(1.456) < 1.456 > echo abs(-5.456) < 5.456 > echo abs(-4) < 4 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->abs() acos({expr}) *acos()* Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float| in the range of [0, pi]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range [-1, 1]. Otherwise acos() returns "nan". Examples: > :echo acos(0) < 1.570796 > :echo acos(-0.5) < 2.094395 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->acos() add({object}, {expr}) *add()* Append the item {expr} to |List| or |Blob| {object}. Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: > :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item) :call add(mylist, "woodstock") < Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. When {object} is a |Blob| then {expr} must be a number. Use |insert()| to add an item at another position. Returns 1 if {object} is not a |List| or a |Blob|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->add(val1)->add(val2) and({expr}, {expr}) *and()* Bitwise AND on the two arguments. The arguments are converted to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Also see `or()` and `xor()`. Example: > :let flag = and(bits, 0x80) < Can also be used as a |method|: > :let flag = bits->and(0x80) append({lnum}, {text}) *append()* When {text} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer. Otherwise append {text} as one text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer. Any type of item is accepted and converted to a String. {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory), 0 for success. When {text} is an empty list zero is returned, no matter the value of {lnum}. In |Vim9| script an invalid argument or negative number results in an error. Example: > :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END") :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"]) < Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is passed as the second argument: > mylist->append(lnum) appendbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *appendbufline()* Like |append()| but append the text in buffer {buf}. This function works only for loaded buffers. First call |bufload()| if needed. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|. {lnum} is the line number to append below. Note that using |line()| would use the current buffer, not the one appending to. Use "$" to append at the end of the buffer. Other string values are not supported. On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an error is given for an invalid {lnum}. If {buf} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an error message is given. Example: > :let failed = appendbufline(13, 0, "# THE START") < However, when {text} is an empty list then no error is given for an invalid {lnum}, since {lnum} isn't actually used. Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is passed as the second argument: > mylist->appendbufline(buf, lnum) argc([{winid}]) *argc()* The result is the number of files in the argument list. See |arglist|. If {winid} is not supplied, the argument list of the current window is used. If {winid} is -1, the global argument list is used. Otherwise {winid} specifies the window of which the argument list is used: either the window number or the window ID. Returns -1 if the {winid} argument is invalid. *argidx()* argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|. *arglistid()* arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Return the argument list ID. This is a number which identifies the argument list being used. Zero is used for the global argument list. See |arglist|. Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid. Without arguments use the current window. With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page. With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab page. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. *argv()* argv([{nr} [, {winid}]]) The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list. See |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one. Example: > :let i = 0 :while i < argc() : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.') : exe 'amenu Arg.' .. f .. ' :e ' .. f .. '<CR>' : let i = i + 1 :endwhile < Without the {nr} argument, or when {nr} is -1, a |List| with the whole |arglist| is returned. The {winid} argument specifies the window ID, see |argc()|. For the Vim command line arguments see |v:argv|. Returns an empty string if {nr}th argument is not present in the argument list. Returns an empty List if the {winid} argument is invalid. asin({expr}) *asin()* Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float| in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range [-1, 1]. Returns "nan" if {expr} is outside the range [-1, 1]. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo asin(0.8) < 0.927295 > :echo asin(-0.5) < -0.523599 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->asin() assert_ functions are documented here: |assert-functions-details| atan({expr}) *atan()* Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo atan(100) < 1.560797 > :echo atan(-4.01) < -1.326405 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->atan() atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()* Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi]. {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo atan2(-1, 1) < -0.785398 > :echo atan2(1, -1) < 2.356194 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->atan2(1) autocmd_add({acmds}) *autocmd_add()* Adds a List of autocmds and autocmd groups. The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with the following optional items: bufnr buffer number to add a buffer-local autocmd. If this item is specified, then the "pattern" item is ignored. cmd Ex command to execute for this autocmd event event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|. This can be either a String with a single event name or a List of event names. group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|. If this group doesn't exist then it is created. If not specified or empty, then the default group is used. nested boolean flag, set to v:true to add a nested autocmd. Refer to |autocmd-nested|. once boolean flag, set to v:true to add an autocmd which executes only once. Refer to |autocmd-once|. pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to |autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is present, then this item is ignored. This can be a String with a single pattern or a List of patterns. replace boolean flag, set to v:true to remove all the commands associated with the specified autocmd event and group and add the {cmd}. This is useful to avoid adding the same command multiple times for an autocmd event in a group. Returns v:true on success and v:false on failure. Examples: > " Create a buffer-local autocmd for buffer 5 let acmd = {} let acmd.group = 'MyGroup' let acmd.event = 'BufEnter' let acmd.bufnr = 5 let acmd.cmd = 'call BufEnterFunc()' call autocmd_add([acmd]) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_add() < autocmd_delete({acmds}) *autocmd_delete()* Deletes a List of autocmds and autocmd groups. The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with the following optional items: bufnr buffer number to delete a buffer-local autocmd. If this item is specified, then the "pattern" item is ignored. cmd Ex command for this autocmd event event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|. If '*' then all the autocmd events in this group are deleted. group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|. If not specified or empty, then the default group is used. nested set to v:true for a nested autocmd. Refer to |autocmd-nested|. once set to v:true for an autocmd which executes only once. Refer to |autocmd-once|. pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to |autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is present, then this item is ignored. If only {group} is specified in a {acmds} entry and {event}, {pattern} and {cmd} are not specified, then that autocmd group is deleted. Returns |v:true| on success and |v:false| on failure. Examples: > " :autocmd! BufLeave *.vim let acmd = #{event: 'BufLeave', pattern: '*.vim'} call autocmd_delete([acmd]}) " :autocmd! MyGroup1 BufLeave let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup1', event: 'BufLeave'} call autocmd_delete([acmd]) " :autocmd! MyGroup2 BufEnter *.c let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: 'BufEnter', \ pattern: '*.c'} " :autocmd! MyGroup2 * *.c let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: '*', \ pattern: '*.c'} call autocmd_delete([acmd]) " :autocmd! MyGroup3 let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup3'} call autocmd_delete([acmd]) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_delete() autocmd_get([{opts}]) *autocmd_get()* Returns a |List| of autocmds. If {opts} is not supplied, then returns the autocmds for all the events in all the groups. The optional {opts} Dict argument supports the following items: group Autocmd group name. If specified, returns only the autocmds defined in this group. If the specified group doesn't exist, results in an error message. If set to an empty string, then the default autocmd group is used. event Autocmd event name. If specified, returns only the autocmds defined for this event. If set to "*", then returns autocmds for all the events. If the specified event doesn't exist, results in an error message. pattern Autocmd pattern. If specified, returns only the autocmds defined for this pattern. A combination of the above three times can be supplied in {opts}. Each Dict in the returned List contains the following items: bufnr For buffer-local autocmds, buffer number where the autocmd is defined. cmd Command executed for this autocmd. event Autocmd event name. group Autocmd group name. nested Boolean flag, set to v:true for a nested autocmd. See |autocmd-nested|. once Boolean flag, set to v:true, if the autocmd will be executed only once. See |autocmd-once|. pattern Autocmd pattern. For a buffer-local autocmd, this will be of the form "<buffer=n>". If there are multiple commands for an autocmd event in a group, then separate items are returned for each command. Returns an empty List if an autocmd with the specified group or event or pattern is not found. Examples: > " :autocmd MyGroup echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'Mygroup'}) " :autocmd G BufUnload echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'G', event: 'BufUnload'}) " :autocmd G * *.ts let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: '*', pattern: '*.ts'} echo autocmd_get(acmd) " :autocmd Syntax echo autocmd_get(#{event: 'Syntax'}) " :autocmd G BufEnter *.ts let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: 'BufEnter', \ pattern: '*.ts'} echo autocmd_get(acmd) < Can also be used as a |method|: > Getopts()->autocmd_get() < balloon_gettext() *balloon_gettext()* Return the current text in the balloon. Only for the string, not used for the List. Returns an empty string if balloon is not present. balloon_show({expr}) *balloon_show()* Show {expr} inside the balloon. For the GUI {expr} is used as a string. For a terminal {expr} can be a list, which contains the lines of the balloon. If {expr} is not a list it will be split with |balloon_split()|. If {expr} is an empty string any existing balloon is removed. Example: > func GetBalloonContent() " ... initiate getting the content return '' endfunc set balloonexpr=GetBalloonContent() func BalloonCallback(result) call balloon_show(a:result) endfunc < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->balloon_show() < The intended use is that fetching the content of the balloon is initiated from 'balloonexpr'. It will invoke an asynchronous method, in which a callback invokes balloon_show(). The 'balloonexpr' itself can return an empty string or a placeholder, e.g. "loading...". When showing a balloon is not possible then nothing happens, no error message is given. {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| or |+balloon_eval_term| feature} balloon_split({msg}) *balloon_split()* Split String {msg} into lines to be displayed in a balloon. The splits are made for the current window size and optimize to show debugger output. Returns a |List| with the split lines. Returns an empty List on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->balloon_split()->balloon_show() < {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term| feature} blob2list({blob}) *blob2list()* Return a List containing the number value of each byte in Blob {blob}. Examples: > blob2list(0z0102.0304) returns [1, 2, 3, 4] blob2list(0z) returns [] < Returns an empty List on error. |list2blob()| does the opposite. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBlob()->blob2list() < *browse()* browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions). The input fields are: {save} when |TRUE|, select file to write {title} title for the requester {initdir} directory to start browsing in {default} default file name An empty string is returned when the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or browsing is not possible. *browsedir()* browsedir({title}, {initdir}) Put up a directory requester. This only works when "has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions). On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory to be used. The input fields are: {title} title for the requester {initdir} directory to start browsing in When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. bufadd({name}) *bufadd()* Add a buffer to the buffer list with name {name} (must be a String). If a buffer for file {name} already exists, return that buffer number. Otherwise return the buffer number of the newly created buffer. When {name} is an empty string then a new buffer is always created. The buffer will not have 'buflisted' set and not be loaded yet. To add some text to the buffer use this: > let bufnr = bufadd('someName') call bufload(bufnr) call setbufline(bufnr, 1, ['some', 'text']) < Returns 0 on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > let bufnr = 'somename'->bufadd() bufexists({buf}) *bufexists()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called {buf} exists. If the {buf} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used. Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. If the {buf} argument is a string it must match a buffer name exactly. The name can be: - Relative to the current directory. - A full path. - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile". - A URL name. Unlisted buffers will be found. Note that help files are listed by their short name in the output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their long name to be able to find them. bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1" Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate file name. Can also be used as a |method|: > let exists = 'somename'->bufexists() < Obsolete name: buffer_exists(). *buffer_exists()* buflisted({buf}) *buflisted()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called {buf} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set). The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > let listed = 'somename'->buflisted() bufload({buf}) *bufload()* Ensure the buffer {buf} is loaded. When the buffer name refers to an existing file then the file is read. Otherwise the buffer will be empty. If the buffer was already loaded then there is no change. If the buffer is not related to a file then no file is read (e.g., when 'buftype' is "nofile"). If there is an existing swap file for the file of the buffer, there will be no dialog, the buffer will be loaded anyway. The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > eval 'somename'->bufload() bufloaded({buf}) *bufloaded()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called {buf} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden). The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > let loaded = 'somename'->bufloaded() bufname([{buf}]) *bufname()* The result is the name of a buffer. Mostly as it is displayed by the `:ls` command, but not using special names such as "[No Name]". If {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used. If {buf} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given. Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. If {buf} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one match an empty string is returned. "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the alternate buffer. A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the pattern. Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted buffers are searched for. If the {buf} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: > :echo bufname("3" + 0) < Can also be used as a |method|: > echo bufnr->bufname() < If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty string is returned. > bufname("#") alternate buffer name bufname(3) name of buffer 3 bufname("%") name of current buffer bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches. < *buffer_name()* Obsolete name: buffer_name(). *bufnr()* bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]]) The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by the `:ls` command. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the {create} argument is present and TRUE, a new, unlisted, buffer is created and its number is returned. Example: > let newbuf = bufnr('Scratch001', 1) < Using an empty name uses the current buffer. To create a new buffer with an empty name use |bufadd()|. bufnr("$") is the last buffer: > :let last_buffer = bufnr("$") < The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer. Can also be used as a |method|: > echo bufref->bufnr() < Obsolete name: buffer_number(). *buffer_number()* *last_buffer_nr()* Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr(). bufwinid({buf}) *bufwinid()* The result is a Number, which is the |window-ID| of the first window associated with buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: > echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinid(1)) < Only deals with the current tab page. See |win_findbuf()| for finding more. Can also be used as a |method|: > FindBuffer()->bufwinid() bufwinnr({buf}) *bufwinnr()* Like |bufwinid()| but return the window number instead of the |window-ID|. If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: > echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinnr(1)) < The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" |:wincmd|. Can also be used as a |method|: > FindBuffer()->bufwinnr() byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()* Return the line number that contains the character at byte count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first character has byte count one. Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|. Returns -1 if the {byte} value is invalid. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetOffset()->byte2line() < {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset| feature} byteidx({expr}, {nr} [, {utf16}]) *byteidx()* Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the String {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it then returns zero. If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is equal to {nr}. Composing characters are not counted separately, their byte length is added to the preceding base character. See |byteidxcomp()| below for counting composing characters separately. When {utf16} is present and TRUE, {nr} is used as the UTF-16 index in the String {expr} instead of as the character index. The UTF-16 index is the index in the string when it is encoded with 16-bit words. If the specified UTF-16 index is in the middle of a character (e.g. in a 4-byte character), then the byte index of the first byte in the character is returned. Refer to |string-offset-encoding| for more information. Example : > echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3)) < will display the fourth character. Another way to do the same: > let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3)) echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1)) < Also see |strgetchar()| and |strcharpart()|. If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned. If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string in bytes is returned. See |charidx()| and |utf16idx()| for getting the character and UTF-16 index respectively from the byte index. Examples: > echo byteidx('a😊😊', 2) returns 5 echo byteidx('a😊😊', 2, 1) returns 1 echo byteidx('a😊😊', 3, 1) returns 5 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->byteidx(idx) byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr} [, {utf16}]) *byteidxcomp()* Like byteidx(), except that a composing character is counted as a separate character. Example: > let s = 'e' .. nr2char(0x301) echo byteidx(s, 1) echo byteidxcomp(s, 1) echo byteidxcomp(s, 2) < The first and third echo result in 3 ('e' plus composing character is 3 bytes), the second echo results in 1 ('e' is one byte). Only works differently from byteidx() when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->byteidxcomp(idx) call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699* Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as arguments. {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function. a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line. Returns the return value of the called function. {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFunc()->call([arg, arg], dict) ceil({expr}) *ceil()* Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to {expr} as a |Float| (round up). {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > echo ceil(1.456) < 2.0 > echo ceil(-5.456) < -5.0 > echo ceil(4.0) < 4.0 Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->ceil() ch_ functions are documented here: |channel-functions-details| changenr() *changenr()* Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used with the |:undo| command. When a change was made it is the number of that change. After redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is one less than the number of the undone change. Returns 0 if the undo list is empty. char2nr({string} [, {utf8}]) *char2nr()* Return Number value of the first char in {string}. Examples: > char2nr(" ") returns 32 char2nr("ABC") returns 65 < When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": > char2nr("á") returns 225 char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195 < When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat as UTF-8 characters. A combining character is a separate character. |nr2char()| does the opposite. To turn a string into a list of character numbers: > let str = "ABC" let list = map(split(str, '\zs'), {_, val -> char2nr(val)}) < Result: [65, 66, 67] Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetChar()->char2nr() charclass({string}) *charclass()* Return the character class of the first character in {string}. The character class is one of: 0 blank 1 punctuation 2 word character 3 emoji other specific Unicode class The class is used in patterns and word motions. Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|. charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) *charcol()* Same as |col()| but returns the character index of the column position given with {expr} instead of the byte position. Example: With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": > charcol('.') returns 3 col('.') returns 7 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPos()->col() < *charidx()* charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc} [, {utf16}]]) Return the character index of the byte at {idx} in {string}. The index of the first character is zero. If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is equal to {idx}. When {countcc} is omitted or |FALSE|, then composing characters are not counted separately, their byte length is added to the preceding base character. When {countcc} is |TRUE|, then composing characters are counted as separate characters. When {utf16} is present and TRUE, {idx} is used as the UTF-16 index in the String {expr} instead of as the byte index. Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid or if there are less than {idx} bytes. If there are exactly {idx} bytes the length of the string in characters is returned. An error is given and -1 is returned if the first argument is not a string, the second argument is not a number or when the third argument is present and is not zero or one. See |byteidx()| and |byteidxcomp()| for getting the byte index from the character index and |utf16idx()| for getting the UTF-16 index from the character index. Refer to |string-offset-encoding| for more information. Examples: > echo charidx('áb́ć', 3) returns 1 echo charidx('áb́ć', 6, 1) returns 4 echo charidx('áb́ć', 16) returns -1 echo charidx('a😊😊', 4, 0, 1) returns 2 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->charidx(idx) chdir({dir}) *chdir()* Change the current working directory to {dir}. The scope of the directory change depends on the directory of the current window: - If the current window has a window-local directory (|:lcd|), then changes the window local directory. - Otherwise, if the current tabpage has a local directory (|:tcd|) then changes the tabpage local directory. - Otherwise, changes the global directory. {dir} must be a String. If successful, returns the previous working directory. Pass this to another chdir() to restore the directory. On failure, returns an empty string. Example: > let save_dir = chdir(newdir) if save_dir != "" " ... do some work call chdir(save_dir) endif < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetDir()->chdir() < cindent({lnum}) *cindent()* Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C indenting rules, as with 'cindent'. The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. See |C-indenting|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->cindent() clearmatches([{win}]) *clearmatches()* Clears all matches previously defined for the current window by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or window ID instead of the current window. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWin()->clearmatches() < col({expr} [, {winid}]) *col()* The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: . the cursor position $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the number of bytes in the cursor line plus one) 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is returned) v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in that it's updated right away. Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is out of range then col() returns zero. With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for that window instead of the current window. To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use |getpos()|. For the screen column position use |virtcol()|. For the character position use |charcol()|. Note that only marks in the current file can be used. Examples: > col(".") column of cursor col("$") length of cursor line plus one col("'t") column of mark t col("'" .. markname) column of mark markname < The first column is 1. Returns 0 if {expr} is invalid or when the window with ID {winid} is not found. For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another buffer. For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the line. Also, when using a <Cmd> mapping the cursor isn't moved, this can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: > :imap <F2> <Cmd>echowin col(".")<CR> < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPos()->col() < complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785* Set the matches for Insert mode completion. Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping with CTRL-R = (see |i_CTRL-R|). It does not work after CTRL-O or with an expression mapping. {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a match. {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match. See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible. "longest" in 'completeopt' is ignored. Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid inserting anything that would cause completion to stop. The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if specified, see |ins-completion-menu|. Example: > inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR> func ListMonths() call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March', \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', \ 'October', 'November', 'December']) return '' endfunc < This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetMatches()->complete(col('.')) complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()* Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the function specified with the 'completefunc' option. Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory), 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in the list. See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMoreMatches()->complete_add() complete_check() *complete_check()* Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches. This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time. Returns |TRUE| when searching for matches is to be aborted, zero otherwise. Only to be used by the function specified with the 'completefunc' option. complete_info([{what}]) *complete_info()* Returns a |Dictionary| with information about Insert mode completion. See |ins-completion|. The items are: mode Current completion mode name string. See |complete_info_mode| for the values. pum_visible |TRUE| if popup menu is visible. See |pumvisible()|. items List of completion matches. Each item is a dictionary containing the entries "word", "abbr", "menu", "kind", "info" and "user_data". See |complete-items|. selected Selected item index. First index is zero. Index is -1 if no item is selected (showing typed text only, or the last completion after no item is selected when using the <Up> or <Down> keys) inserted Inserted string. [NOT IMPLEMENTED YET] *complete_info_mode* mode values are: "" Not in completion mode "keyword" Keyword completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N| "ctrl_x" Just pressed CTRL-X |i_CTRL-X| "scroll" Scrolling with |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-E| or |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y| "whole_line" Whole lines |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L| "files" File names |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-F| "tags" Tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| "path_defines" Definition completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| "path_patterns" Include completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I| "dictionary" Dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| "thesaurus" Thesaurus |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| "cmdline" Vim Command line |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V| "function" User defined completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| "omni" Omni completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| "spell" Spelling suggestions |i_CTRL-X_s| "eval" |complete()| completion "unknown" Other internal modes If the optional {what} list argument is supplied, then only the items listed in {what} are returned. Unsupported items in {what} are silently ignored. To get the position and size of the popup menu, see |pum_getpos()|. It's also available in |v:event| during the |CompleteChanged| event. Returns an empty |Dictionary| on error. Examples: > " Get all items call complete_info() " Get only 'mode' call complete_info(['mode']) " Get only 'mode' and 'pum_visible' call complete_info(['mode', 'pum_visible']) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetItems()->complete_info() < *confirm()* confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first choice this is 1. Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|. {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is used (and translated). {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit. {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated by '\n', e.g. > confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel") < The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice. Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does not need to be the first letter: > confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All") < For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as the default shortcut key. Case is ignored. The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If {default} is omitted, 1 is used. The optional {type} String argument gives the type of dialog. This is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32 GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question", "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first character is relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used. If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C, or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0. An example: > let choice = confirm("What do you want?", \ "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2) if choice == 0 echo "make up your mind!" elseif choice == 3 echo "tasteful" else echo "I prefer bananas myself." endif < In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included, the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm() tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems the horizontal layout is always used. Can also be used as a |method|in: > BuildMessage()->confirm("&Yes\n&No") < *copy()* copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't different from using {expr} directly. When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means that the original |List| can be changed without changing the copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|. Also see |deepcopy()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->copy() cos({expr}) *cos()* Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo cos(100) < 0.862319 > :echo cos(-4.01) < -0.646043 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->cos() cosh({expr}) *cosh()* Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range [1, inf]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo cosh(0.5) < 1.127626 > :echo cosh(-0.5) < -1.127626 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->cosh() count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()* *E706* Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}. If {start} is given then start with the item with this index. {start} can only be used with a |List|. When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored. When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping occurrences of {expr} is returned. Zero is returned when {expr} is an empty string. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->count(val) < *cscope_connection()* cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no parameters are specified, then the function returns: 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or if there are no cscope connections; 1, if there is at least one cscope connection. If parameters are specified, then the value of {num} determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked: {num} Description of existence check ----- ------------------------------ 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()"). 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for {dbpath}. 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for {dbpath}. 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both {dbpath} and {prepend}. 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both {dbpath} and {prepend}. Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive! Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): > # pid database name prepend path 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local < Invocation Return Val ~ ---------- ---------- > cscope_connection() 1 cscope_connection(1, "out") 1 cscope_connection(2, "out") 0 cscope_connection(3, "out") 0 cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1 cscope_connection(4, "out") 0 cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0 cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1 < cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()* cursor({list}) Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the line {lnum}. The first column is one. When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List| with two, three or four item: [{lnum}, {col}] [{lnum}, {col}, {off}] [{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}] This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|, but without the first item. To position the cursor using {col} as the character count, use |setcursorcharpos()|. Does not change the jumplist. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|, except that if {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line. If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer. If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line, the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the line. If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column. If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column for vertical movement. Otherwise {col} is used. When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last character. Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCursorPos()->cursor() debugbreak({pid}) *debugbreak()* Specifically used to interrupt a program being debugged. It will cause process {pid} to get a SIGTRAP. Behavior for other processes is undefined. See |terminal-debugger|. {only available on MS-Windows} Returns |TRUE| if successfully interrupted the program. Otherwise returns |FALSE|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPid()->debugbreak() deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698* Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't different from using {expr} directly. When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means that the original |List| can be changed without changing the copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List| or |Dictionary|, a copy for it is made, recursively. Thus changing an item in the copy does not change the contents of the original |List|. A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|. When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail. *E724* Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with {noref} set to 1 will fail. Also see |copy()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetObject()->deepcopy() delete({fname} [, {flags}]) *delete()* Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the name {fname}. This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link. The symbolic link itself is deleted, not what it points to. When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name {fname}. This fails when directory {fname} is not empty. When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name {fname} and everything in it, recursively. BE CAREFUL! Note: on MS-Windows it is not possible to delete a directory that is being used. The result is a Number, which is 0/false if the delete operation was successful and -1/true when the deletion failed or partly failed. Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|. To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete| or |deletebufline()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->delete() deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}]) *deletebufline()* Delete lines {first} to {last} (inclusive) from buffer {buf}. If {last} is omitted then delete line {first} only. On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned. This function works only for loaded buffers. First call |bufload()| if needed. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. {first} and {last} are used like with |getline()|. Note that when using |line()| this refers to the current buffer. Use "$" to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->deletebufline(1) < *did_filetype()* did_filetype() Returns |TRUE| when autocommands are being executed and the FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts that detect the file type. |FileType| Returns |FALSE| when `:setf FALLBACK` was used. When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax file. diff({fromlist}, {tolist} [, {options}]) *diff()* Returns a String or a List containing the diff between the strings in {fromlist} and {tolist}. Uses the Vim internal diff library to compute the diff. *E106* The optional "output" item in {options} specifies the returned diff format. The following values are supported: indices Return a List of the starting and ending indices and a count of the strings in each diff hunk. unified Return the unified diff output as a String. This is the default. If the "output" item in {options} is "indices", then a List is returned. Each List item contains a Dict with the following items for each diff hunk: from_idx start index in {fromlist} for this diff hunk. from_count number of strings in {fromlist} that are added/removed/modified in this diff hunk. to_idx start index in {tolist} for this diff hunk. to_count number of strings in {tolist} that are added/removed/modified in this diff hunk. The {options} Dict argument also specifies diff options (similar to 'diffopt') and supports the following items: iblank ignore changes where lines are all blank. icase ignore changes in case of text. iwhite ignore changes in amount of white space. iwhiteall ignore all white space changes. iwhiteeol ignore white space changes at end of line. indent-heuristic use the indent heuristic for the internal diff library. algorithm Dict specifying the diff algorithm to use. Supported boolean items are "myers", "minimal", "patience" and "histogram". For more information about these options, refer to 'diffopt'. Returns an empty List or String if {fromlist} and {tolist} are identical. Examples: > :echo diff(['abc'], ['xxx']) @@ -1 +1 @@ -abc +xxx :echo diff(['abc'], ['xxx'], {'output': 'indices'}) [{'from_idx': 0, 'from_count': 1, 'to_idx': 0, 'to_count': 1}] :echo diff(readfile('oldfile'), readfile('newfile')) :echo diff(getbufline(5, 1, '$'), getbufline(6, 1, '$')) < For more examples, refer to |diff-func-examples| Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFromList->diff(to_list) < diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()* Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}. These are the lines that were inserted at this point in another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the display but don't exist in the buffer. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->diff_filler() diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()* Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a diff change zero is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first line. The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain syntax information about the highlighting. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->diff_hlID(col) < digraph_get({chars}) *digraph_get()* *E1214* Return the digraph of {chars}. This should be a string with exactly two characters. If {chars} are not just two characters, or the digraph of {chars} does not exist, an error is given and an empty string is returned. The character will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding' when needed. This does require the conversion to be available, it might fail. Also see |digraph_getlist()|. Examples: > " Get a built-in digraph :echo digraph_get('00') " Returns '∞' " Get a user-defined digraph :call digraph_set('aa', 'あ') :echo digraph_get('aa') " Returns 'あ' < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetChars()->digraph_get() < This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will display an error message. digraph_getlist([{listall}]) *digraph_getlist()* Return a list of digraphs. If the {listall} argument is given and it is TRUE, return all digraphs, including the default digraphs. Otherwise, return only user-defined digraphs. The characters will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding' when needed. This does require the conservation to be available, it might fail. Also see |digraph_get()|. Examples: > " Get user-defined digraphs :echo digraph_getlist() " Get all the digraphs, including default digraphs :echo digraph_getlist(1) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetNumber()->digraph_getlist() < This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will display an error message. digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) *digraph_set()* Add digraph {chars} to the list. {chars} must be a string with two characters. {digraph} is a string with one UTF-8 encoded character. *E1215* Be careful, composing characters are NOT ignored. This function is similar to |:digraphs| command, but useful to add digraphs start with a white space. The function result is v:true if |digraph| is registered. If this fails an error message is given and v:false is returned. If you want to define multiple digraphs at once, you can use |digraph_setlist()|. Example: > call digraph_set(' ', 'あ') < Can be used as a |method|: > GetString()->digraph_set('あ') < This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will display an error message. digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) *digraph_setlist()* Similar to |digraph_set()| but this function can add multiple digraphs at once. {digraphlist} is a list composed of lists, where each list contains two strings with {chars} and {digraph} as in |digraph_set()|. *E1216* Example: > call digraph_setlist([['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']]) < It is similar to the following: > for [chars, digraph] in [['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']] call digraph_set(chars, digraph) endfor < Except that the function returns after the first error, following digraphs will not be added. Can be used as a |method|: > GetList()->digraph_setlist() < This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will display an error message. echoraw({string}) *echoraw()* Output {string} as-is, including unprintable characters. This can be used to output a terminal code. For example, to disable modifyOtherKeys: > call echoraw(&t_TE) < and to enable it again: > call echoraw(&t_TI) < Use with care, you can mess up the terminal this way. empty({expr}) *empty()* Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise. - A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any items. - A |String| is empty when its length is zero. - A |Number| and |Float| are empty when their value is zero. - |v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not. - A |Job| is empty when it failed to start. - A |Channel| is empty when it is closed. - A |Blob| is empty when its length is zero. For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the length with zero. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->empty() environ() *environ()* Return all of environment variables as dictionary. You can check if an environment variable exists like this: > :echo has_key(environ(), 'HOME') < Note that the variable name may be CamelCase; to ignore case use this: > :echo index(keys(environ()), 'HOME', 0, 1) != -1 err_teapot([{expr}]) *err_teapot()* Produce an error with number 418, needed for implementation of RFC 2324. If {expr} is present and it is TRUE error 503 is given, indicating that coffee is temporarily not available. If {expr} is present it must be a String. escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()* Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a backslash. Example: > :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \') < results in: > c:\\program\ files\\vim < Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->escape(' \') < *eval()* eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to turn the result of |string()| back into the original value. This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings, Blobs and composites of them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing functions. Can also be used as a |method|: > argv->join()->eval() eventhandler() *eventhandler()* Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character, e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned. executable({expr}) *executable()* This function checks if an executable with the name {expr} exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any arguments. executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT* On MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can optionally be included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are tried. Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be found. If $PATHEXT is not set then ".com;.exe;.bat;.cmd" is used. A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using the name without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an extension. On MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and is not a directory, not if it's really executable. On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is normally found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|. This can be disabled by setting the $NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath environment variable. *NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath* The result is a Number: 1 exists 0 does not exist -1 not implemented on this system |exepath()| can be used to get the full path of an executable. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCommand()->executable() execute({command} [, {silent}]) *execute()* Execute an Ex command or commands and return the output as a string. {command} can be a string or a List. In case of a List the lines are executed one by one. This is more or less equivalent to: > redir => var {command} redir END < Except that line continuation in {command} is not recognized. The optional {silent} argument can have these values: "" no `:silent` used "silent" `:silent` used "silent!" `:silent!` used The default is "silent". Note that with "silent!", unlike `:redir`, error messages are dropped. When using an external command the screen may be messed up, use `system()` instead. *E930* It is not possible to use `:redir` anywhere in {command}. To get a list of lines use `split()` on the result: > execute('args')->split("\n") < To execute a command in another window than the current one use `win_execute()`. When used recursively the output of the recursive call is not included in the output of the higher level call. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCommand()->execute() exepath({expr}) *exepath()* If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path. Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: > echo exepath(v:progpath) < If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then an empty string is returned. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCommand()->exepath() < *exists()* exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if {expr} is defined, zero otherwise. Note: In a compiled |:def| function the evaluation is done at runtime. Use `exists_compiled()` to evaluate the expression at compile time. For checking for a supported feature use |has()|. For checking if a file exists use |filereadable()|. The {expr} argument is a string, which contains one of these: varname internal variable (see dict.key |internal-variables|). Also works list[i] for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary| import.Func entries, |List| items, imported items, etc. Does not work for local variables in a compiled `:def` function. Also works for a function in |Vim9| script, since it can be used as a function reference. Beware that evaluating an index may cause an error message for an invalid expression. E.g.: > :let l = [1, 2, 3] :echo exists("l[5]") < 0 > :echo exists("l[xx]") < E121: Undefined variable: xx 0 &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists, not if it really works) +option-name Vim option that works. $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be done by comparing with an empty string) *funcname built-in function (see |functions|) or user defined function (see |user-functions|) that is implemented. Also works for a variable that is a Funcref. ?funcname built-in function that could be implemented; to be used to check if "funcname" is valid :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user command or command modifier |:command|. Returns: 1 for match with start of a command 2 full match with a command 3 matches several user commands To check for a supported command always check the return value to be 2. :2match The |:2match| command. :3match The |:3match| command (but you probably should not use it, it is reserved for internal usage) #event autocommand defined for this event #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and pattern (the pattern is taken literally and compared to the autocommand patterns character by character) #group autocommand group exists #group#event autocommand defined for this group and event. #group#event#pattern autocommand defined for this group, event and pattern. ##event autocommand for this event is supported. Examples: > exists("&shortname") exists("$HOSTNAME") exists("*strftime") exists("*s:MyFunc") " only for legacy script exists("*MyFunc") exists("bufcount") exists(":Make") exists("#CursorHold") exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz") exists("#filetypeindent") exists("#filetypeindent#FileType") exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*") exists("##ColorScheme") < There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the name. There must be no extra characters after the name, although in a few cases this is ignored. That may become stricter in the future, thus don't count on it! Working example: > exists(":make") < NOT working example: > exists(":make install") < Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the variable itself. For example: > exists(bufcount) < This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable, but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists. Can also be used as a |method|: > Varname()->exists() < exists_compiled({expr}) *exists_compiled()* Like `exists()` but evaluated at compile time. This is useful to skip a block where a function is used that would otherwise give an error: > if exists_compiled('*ThatFunction') ThatFunction('works') endif < If `exists()` were used then a compilation error would be given if ThatFunction() is not defined. {expr} must be a literal string. *E1232* Can only be used in a |:def| function. *E1233* This does not work to check for arguments or local variables. exp({expr}) *exp()* Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range [0, inf]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo exp(2) < 7.389056 > :echo exp(-1) < 0.367879 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->exp() expand({string} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) *expand()* Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {string}. 'wildignorecase' applies. If {list} is given and it is |TRUE|, a List will be returned. Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a file name contains a space] If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name for a non-existing file is not included, unless {string} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', see below. When {string} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated modifiers. Here is a short overview: % current file name # alternate file name #n alternate file name n <cfile> file name under the cursor <afile> autocmd file name <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!) <amatch> autocmd matched name <cexpr> C expression under the cursor <sfile> sourced script file or function name <slnum> sourced script line number or function line number <sflnum> script file line number, also when in a function <SID> "<SNR>123_" where "123" is the current script ID |<SID>| <script> sourced script file, or script file where the current function was defined <stack> call stack <cword> word under the cursor <cWORD> WORD under the cursor <client> the {clientid} of the last received message |server2client()| Modifiers: :p expand to full path :h head (last path component removed) :t tail (last path component only) :r root (one extension removed) :e extension only Example: > :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") .. "/tags" < Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: > :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak") < Use this: > :let doeswork = expand("%:h") .. ".bak" < Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>" is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: > :echo expand(expand("<cfile>")) < There cannot be white space between the variables and the following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used to modify normal file names. When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a '/' added. When 'verbose' is set then expanding '%', '#' and <> items will result in an error message if the argument cannot be expanded. When {string} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line. 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and it is |TRUE|. Names for non-existing files are included. The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find all "README" files in the current directory and below: > :echo expand("**/README") < expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be slow, because a shell may be used to do the expansion. See |expr-env-expand|. The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in "$FOOBAR". See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command. Can also be used as a |method|: > Getpattern()->expand() expandcmd({string} [, {options}]) *expandcmd()* Expand special items in String {string} like what is done for an Ex command such as `:edit`. This expands special keywords, like with |expand()|, and environment variables, anywhere in {string}. "~user" and "~/path" are only expanded at the start. The following items are supported in the {options} Dict argument: errmsg If set to TRUE, error messages are displayed if an error is encountered during expansion. By default, error messages are not displayed. Returns the expanded string. If an error is encountered during expansion, the unmodified {string} is returned. Example: > :echo expandcmd('make %<.o') make /path/runtime/doc/builtin.o :echo expandcmd('make %<.o', {'errmsg': v:true}) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCommand()->expandcmd() < extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()* {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both |Dictionaries|. If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}. If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before the item with index {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero insert before the first item. When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then {expr2} is appended. Examples: > :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5])) :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1) < When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of items copied is equal to the original length of the List. E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item (where N is the original length of the List). Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate two lists into a new list use the + operator: > :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5] < If they are |Dictionaries|: Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}. If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is used to decide what to do: {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1} {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2} {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737* When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed. {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary make a copy of {expr1} first. {expr2} remains unchanged. When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation fails. Returns {expr1}. Returns 0 on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->extend(otherlist) extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extendnew()* Like |extend()| but instead of adding items to {expr1} a new List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains unchanged. feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()* Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they come from a mapping or were typed by the user. By default the string is added to the end of the typeahead buffer, thus if a mapping is still being executed the characters come after them. Use the 'i' flag to insert before other characters, they will be executed next, before any characters from a mapping. The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in {string}. To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example, feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters. A special code that might be useful is <Ignore>, it exits the wait for a character without doing anything. *<Ignore>* {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags: 'm' Remap keys. This is default. If {mode} is absent, keys are remapped. 'n' Do not remap keys. 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo, opening folds, etc. 'L' Lowlevel input. Only works for Unix or when using the GUI. Keys are used as if they were coming from the terminal. Other flags are not used. *E980* When a CTRL-C interrupts and 't' is included it sets the internal "got_int" flag. 'i' Insert the string instead of appending (see above). 'x' Execute commands until typeahead is empty. This is similar to using ":normal!". You can call feedkeys() several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x' (possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the typeahead. Note that when Vim ends in Insert mode it will behave as if <Esc> is typed, to avoid getting stuck, waiting for a character to be typed before the script continues. Note that if you manage to call feedkeys() while executing commands, thus calling it recursively, then all typeahead will be consumed by the last call. 'c' Remove any script context when executing, so that legacy script syntax applies, "s:var" does not work, etc. Note that if the string being fed sets a script context this still applies. '!' When used with 'x' will not end Insert mode. Can be used in a test when a timer is set to exit Insert mode a little later. Useful for testing CursorHoldI. Return value is always 0. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetInput()->feedkeys() filereadable({file}) *filereadable()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a file with the name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist, or is a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {file} is any expression, which is used as a String. If you don't care about the file being readable you can use |glob()|. {file} is used as-is, you may want to expand wildcards first: > echo filereadable('~/.vimrc') 0 echo filereadable(expand('~/.vimrc')) 1 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->filereadable() < *file_readable()* Obsolete name: file_readable(). filewritable({file}) *filewritable()* The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->filewritable() filter({expr1}, {expr2}) *filter()* {expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|. For each item in {expr1} evaluate {expr2} and when the result is zero or false remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|. Similarly for each byte in a |Blob| and each character in a |String|. {expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|. If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the current character. Examples: > call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"') < Removes the items where "OLD" appears. > call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8') < Removes the items with a key below 8. > call filter(var, 0) < Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|. Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments: 1. the key or the index of the current item. 2. the value of the current item. The function must return |TRUE| if the item should be kept. Example that keeps the odd items of a list: > func Odd(idx, val) return a:idx % 2 == 1 endfunc call filter(mylist, function('Odd')) < It is shorter when using a |lambda|. In |Vim9| syntax: > call filter(myList, (idx, val) => idx * val <= 42) < In legacy script syntax: > call filter(myList, {idx, val -> idx * val <= 42}) < If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: > call filter(myList, {idx -> idx % 2 == 1}) < In |Vim9| script the result must be true, false, zero or one. Other values will result in a type error. For a |List| and a |Dictionary| the operation is done in-place. If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy first: > :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"') < Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered, or a new |Blob| or |String|. When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no further items in {expr1} are processed. When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, unless it was defined with the "abort" flag. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->filter(expr2) finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *finddir()* Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching| for the syntax of {path}. Returns the path of the first found match. When the found directory is below the current directory a relative path is returned. Otherwise a full path is returned. If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used. If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of {name} in {path} instead of the first one. When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|. Returns an empty string if the directory is not found. This is quite similar to the ex-command `:find`. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->finddir() findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *findfile()* Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory. Uses 'suffixesadd'. Example: > :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;") < Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until it finds the file "tags.vim". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->findfile() flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flatten()* Flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels. Without {maxdepth} the result is a |List| without nesting, as if {maxdepth} is a very large number. The {list} is changed in place, use |flattennew()| if you do not want that. In Vim9 script flatten() cannot be used, you must always use |flattennew()|. *E900* {maxdepth} means how deep in nested lists changes are made. {list} is not modified when {maxdepth} is 0. {maxdepth} must be positive number. If there is an error the number zero is returned. Example: > :echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5]) < [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] > :echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5], 1) < [1, 2, [3, 4], 5] Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->flatten() < flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flattennew()* Like |flatten()| but first make a copy of {list}. float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()* Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the decimal point. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when 64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or -0x7fffffffffffffff). NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when 64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000). Examples: > echo float2nr(3.95) < 3 > echo float2nr(-23.45) < -23 > echo float2nr(1.0e100) < 2147483647 (or 9223372036854775807) > echo float2nr(-1.0e150) < -2147483647 (or -9223372036854775807) > echo float2nr(1.0e-100) < 0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->float2nr() floor({expr}) *floor()* Return the largest integral value less than or equal to {expr} as a |Float| (round down). {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > echo floor(1.856) < 1.0 > echo floor(-5.456) < -6.0 > echo floor(4.0) < 4.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->floor() fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()* Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2} for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|. {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo fmod(12.33, 1.22) < 0.13 > :echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22) < -0.13 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->fmod(1.22) fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()* Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|' are escaped with a backslash. For most systems the characters escaped are " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'. A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit| and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|). Returns an empty string on error. Example: > :let fname = '+some str%nge|name' :exe "edit " .. fnameescape(fname) < results in executing: > edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->fnameescape() fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()* Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a string of characters like it is used for file names on the command line. See |filename-modifiers|. Example: > :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h") < results in: > /home/user/vim/vim/src < If {mods} is empty or an unsupported modifier is used then {fname} is returned. When {fname} is empty then with {mods} ":h" returns ".", so that `:cd` can be used with it. This is different from expand('%:h') without a buffer name, which returns an empty string. Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use |expand()| first then. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->fnamemodify(':p:h') foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()* The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold. If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->foldclosed() foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()* The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold. If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->foldclosedend() foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()* The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum} in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed. When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the previous line is usually available. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->foldlevel() < *foldtext()* foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables. The returned string looks like this: > +-- 45 lines: abcdef < The number of leading dashes depends on the foldlevel. The "45" is the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text in the first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, "//" or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and 'commentstring' options is removed. When used to draw the actual foldtext, the rest of the line will be filled with the fold char from the 'fillchars' setting. Returns an empty string when there is no fold. {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()* Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context. When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current line, "'m" mark m, etc. Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML. {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->foldtextresult() foreach({expr1}, {expr2}) *foreach()* {expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|. For each item in {expr1} execute {expr2}. {expr1} is not modified; its values may be, as with |:lockvar| 1. |E741| See |map()| and |filter()| to modify {expr1}. {expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|. If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the current character. Examples: > call foreach(mylist, 'used[v:val] = true') < This records the items that are in the {expr1} list. Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then used as a command. Often it is good to use a |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments: 1. the key or the index of the current item. 2. the value of the current item. With a legacy script lambda you don't get an error if it only accepts one argument, but with a Vim9 lambda you get "E1106: One argument too many", the number of arguments must match. If the function returns a value, it is ignored. Returns {expr1} in all cases. When an error is encountered while executing {expr2} no further items in {expr1} are processed. When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, unless it was defined with the "abort" flag. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->foreach(expr2) < *foreground()* foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()| On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use |remote_foreground()| instead. {only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the Win32 console version} fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) *fullcommand()* Get the full command name from a short abbreviated command name; see |20.2| for details on command abbreviations. The string argument {name} may start with a `:` and can include a [range], these are skipped and not returned. Returns an empty string if a command doesn't exist, if it's ambiguous (for user-defined commands) or cannot be shortened this way. |vim9-no-shorten| Without the {vim9} argument uses the current script version. If {vim9} is present and FALSE then legacy script rules are used. When {vim9} is present and TRUE then Vim9 rules are used, e.g. "en" is not a short form of "endif". For example `fullcommand('s')`, `fullcommand('sub')`, `fullcommand(':%substitute')` all return "substitute". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->fullcommand() < *funcref()* funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) Just like |function()|, but the returned Funcref will lookup the function by reference, not by name. This matters when the function {name} is redefined later. Unlike |function()|, {name} must be an existing user function. It only works for an autoloaded function if it has already been loaded (to avoid mistakenly loading the autoload script when only intending to use the function name, use |function()| instead). {name} cannot be a builtin function. Returns 0 on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFuncname()->funcref([arg]) < *function()* *partial* *E700* *E923* function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}. {name} can be the name of a user defined function or an internal function. {name} can also be a Funcref or a partial. When it is a partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict} argument is not allowed. E.g.: > let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg]) let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict) < When using the Funcref the function will be found by {name}, also when it was redefined later. Use |funcref()| to keep the same function. When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial. That means the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called. The arguments are passed to the function in front of other arguments, but after any argument from |method|. Example: > func Callback(arg1, arg2, name) ... let Partial = function('Callback', ['one', 'two']) ... call Partial('name') < Invokes the function as with: > call Callback('one', 'two', 'name') < With a |method|: > func Callback(one, two, three) ... let Partial = function('Callback', ['two']) ... eval 'one'->Partial('three') < Invokes the function as with: > call Callback('one', 'two', 'three') < The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the Funcref. The extra arguments are appended to the list of arguments. Example: > func Callback(arg1, arg2, name) "... let Func = function('Callback', ['one']) let Func2 = function(Func, ['two']) "... call Func2('name') < Invokes the function as with: > call Callback('one', 'two', 'name') < The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function. In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: > function Callback() dict echo "called for " .. self.name endfunction "... let context = {"name": "example"} let Func = function('Callback', context) "... call Func() " will echo: called for example < The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra arguments, these two are equivalent, if Callback() is defined as context.Callback(): > let Func = function('Callback', context) let Func = context.Callback < The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: > function Callback(arg1, count) dict "... let context = {"name": "example"} let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context) "... call Func(500) < Invokes the function as with: > call context.Callback('one', 500) < Returns 0 on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFuncname()->function([arg]) garbagecollect([{atexit}]) *garbagecollect()* Cleanup unused |Lists|, |Dictionaries|, |Channels| and |Jobs| that have circular references. There is hardly ever a need to invoke this function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after 'updatetime'. Items without circular references are always freed when they become unused. This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs for a long time. When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks. The garbage collection is not done immediately but only when it's safe to perform. This is when waiting for the user to type a character. To force garbage collection immediately use |test_garbagecollect_now()|. get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()* Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is omitted. Preferably used as a |method|: > mylist->get(idx) get({blob}, {idx} [, {default}]) Get byte {idx} from |Blob| {blob}. When this byte is not available return {default}. Return -1 when {default} is omitted. Preferably used as a |method|: > myblob->get(idx) get({dict}, {key} [, {default}]) Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this item is not available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is omitted. Useful example: > let val = get(g:, 'var_name', 'default') < This gets the value of g:var_name if it exists, and uses 'default' when it does not exist. Preferably used as a |method|: > mydict->get(key) get({func}, {what}) Get item {what} from Funcref {func}. Possible values for {what} are: "name" The function name "func" The function "dict" The dictionary "args" The list with arguments Returns zero on error. Preferably used as a |method|: > myfunc->get(what) < *getbufinfo()* getbufinfo([{buf}]) getbufinfo([{dict}]) Get information about buffers as a List of Dictionaries. Without an argument information about all the buffers is returned. When the argument is a |Dictionary| only the buffers matching the specified criteria are returned. The following keys can be specified in {dict}: buflisted include only listed buffers. bufloaded include only loaded buffers. bufmodified include only modified buffers. Otherwise, {buf} specifies a particular buffer to return information for. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If the buffer is found the returned List has one item. Otherwise the result is an empty list. Each returned List item is a dictionary with the following entries: bufnr Buffer number. changed TRUE if the buffer is modified. changedtick Number of changes made to the buffer. command TRUE if the buffer belongs to the command-line window |cmdwin|. hidden TRUE if the buffer is hidden. lastused Timestamp in seconds, like |localtime()|, when the buffer was last used. {only with the |+viminfo| feature} listed TRUE if the buffer is listed. lnum Line number used for the buffer when opened in the current window. Only valid if the buffer has been displayed in the window in the past. If you want the line number of the last known cursor position in a given window, use |line()|: > :echo line('.', {winid}) < linecount Number of lines in the buffer (only valid when loaded) loaded TRUE if the buffer is loaded. name Full path to the file in the buffer. signs List of signs placed in the buffer. Each list item is a dictionary with the following fields: id sign identifier lnum line number name sign name variables A reference to the dictionary with buffer-local variables. windows List of |window-ID|s that display this buffer popups List of popup |window-ID|s that display this buffer Examples: > for buf in getbufinfo() echo buf.name endfor for buf in getbufinfo({'buflisted':1}) if buf.changed .... endif endfor < To get buffer-local options use: > getbufvar({bufnr}, '&option_name') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->getbufinfo() < *getbufline()* getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}]) Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end} (inclusive) in the buffer {buf}. If {end} is omitted, a |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned. See `getbufoneline()` for only getting the line. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the buffer. Otherwise a number must be used. When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned. When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned. This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned. Example: > :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->getbufline(lnum) < *getbufoneline()* getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum}) Just like `getbufline()` but only get one line and return it as a string. getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getbufvar()* The result is the value of option or local buffer variable {varname} in buffer {buf}. Note that the name without "b:" must be used. The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty returns a |Dictionary| with all the buffer-local variables. When {varname} is equal to "&" returns a |Dictionary| with all the buffer-local options. Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" returns the value of a buffer-local option. This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or window-local option. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty string is returned, there is no error message. Examples: > :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod") :echo "todo myvar = " .. getbufvar("todo", "myvar") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->getbufvar(varname) < getcellwidths() *getcellwidths()* Returns a |List| of cell widths of character ranges overridden by |setcellwidths()|. The format is equal to the argument of |setcellwidths()|. If no character ranges have their cell widths overridden, an empty List is returned. getchangelist([{buf}]) *getchangelist()* Returns the |changelist| for the buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't exist, an empty list is returned. The returned list contains two entries: a list with the change locations and the current position in the list. Each entry in the change list is a dictionary with the following entries: col column number coladd column offset for 'virtualedit' lnum line number If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, then the current position refers to the position in the list. For other buffers, it is set to the length of the list. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->getchangelist() getchar([expr]) *getchar()* Get a single character from the user or input stream. If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available. Return zero otherwise. If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is not consumed. Return zero if no character available. If you prefer always getting a string use |getcharstr()|. Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or special key is returned. If it is a single character, the result is a Number. Use |nr2char()| to convert it to a String. Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character. For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is not included in the character. When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape sequence. When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a one-byte character it is the character itself as a number. Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers. When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|, |v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_winid| and |v:mouse_win|. |getmousepos()| can also be used. Mouse move events will be ignored. This example positions the mouse as it would normally happen: > let c = getchar() if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0 exe v:mouse_win .. "wincmd w" exe v:mouse_lnum exe "normal " .. v:mouse_col .. "|" endif < When using bracketed paste only the first character is returned, the rest of the pasted text is dropped. |xterm-bracketed-paste|. There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the user that a character has to be typed. The screen is not redrawn, e.g. when resizing the window. When using a popup window it should work better with a |popup-filter|. There is no mapping for the character. Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del> key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character sequence. Examples: > getchar() == "\<Del>" getchar() == "\<S-Left>" < This example redefines "f" to ignore case: > :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR> :function FindChar() : let c = nr2char(getchar()) : while col('.') < col('$') - 1 : normal l : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c : break : endif : endwhile :endfunction < You may also receive synthetic characters, such as |<CursorHold>|. Often you will want to ignore this and get another character: > :function GetKey() : let c = getchar() : while c == "\<CursorHold>" : let c = getchar() : endwhile : return c :endfunction getcharmod() *getcharmod()* The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way. These values are added together: 2 shift 4 control 8 alt (meta) 16 meta (when it's different from ALT) 32 mouse double click 64 mouse triple click 96 mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64) 128 command (Mac) or super (GTK) Only the modifiers that have not been included in the character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A" without a modifier. Returns 0 if no modifiers are used. *getcharpos()* getcharpos({expr}) Get the position for String {expr}. Same as |getpos()| but the column number in the returned List is a character index instead of a byte index. If |getpos()| returns a very large column number, equal to |v:maxcol|, then getcharpos() will return the character index of the last character. Example: With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": > getcharpos('.') returns [0, 5, 3, 0] getpos('.') returns [0, 5, 7, 0] < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMark()->getcharpos() getcharsearch() *getcharsearch()* Return the current character search information as a {dict} with the following entries: char character previously used for a character search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string if no character search has been performed forward direction of character search; 1 for forward, 0 for backward until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T| character search, 0 for an |f| or |F| character search This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous character search: > :nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ',' :nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';' < Also see |setcharsearch()|. getcharstr([expr]) *getcharstr()* Get a single character from the user or input stream as a string. If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. If [expr] is 0 or false, only get a character when one is available. Return an empty string otherwise. If [expr] is 1 or true, only check if a character is available, it is not consumed. Return an empty string if no character is available. Otherwise this works like |getchar()|, except that a number result is converted to a string. getcmdcompltype() *getcmdcompltype()* Return the type of the current command-line completion. Only works when the command line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. See |:command-completion| for the return string. Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and |setcmdline()|. Returns an empty string when completion is not defined. getcmdline() *getcmdline()* Return the current command-line. Only works when the command line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Example: > :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR> < Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |setcmdline()|. Returns an empty string when entering a password or using |inputsecret()|. getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()* Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a byte count. The first column is 1. Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. Returns 0 otherwise. Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and |setcmdline()|. getcmdscreenpos() *getcmdscreenpos()* Return the screen position of the cursor in the command line as a byte count. The first column is 1. Instead of |getcmdpos()|, it adds the prompt position. Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. Returns 0 otherwise. Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and |setcmdline()|. getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()* Return the current command-line type. Possible return values are: : normal Ex command > debug mode command |debug-mode| / forward search command ? backward search command @ |input()| command - |:insert| or |:append| command = |i_CTRL-R_=| Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. Returns an empty string otherwise. Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. getcmdwintype() *getcmdwintype()* Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string when not in the command-line window. getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}]) *getcompletion()* Return a list of command-line completion matches. The String {type} argument specifies what for. The following completion types are supported: arglist file names in argument list augroup autocmd groups buffer buffer names behave |:behave| suboptions breakpoint |:breakadd| and |:breakdel| suboptions color color schemes command Ex command cmdline |cmdline-completion| result compiler compilers cscope |:cscope| suboptions custom,{func} custom completion, defined via {func} customlist,{func} custom completion, defined via {func} diff_buffer |:diffget| and |:diffput| completion dir directory names environment environment variable names event autocommand events expression Vim expression file file and directory names file_in_path file and directory names in |'path'| filetype filetype names |'filetype'| function function name help help subjects highlight highlight groups history |:history| suboptions keymap keyboard mappings locale locale names (as output of locale -a) mapclear buffer argument mapping mapping name menu menus messages |:messages| suboptions option options packadd optional package |pack-add| names runtime |:runtime| completion scriptnames sourced script names |:scriptnames| shellcmd Shell command sign |:sign| suboptions syntax syntax file names |'syntax'| syntime |:syntime| suboptions tag tags tag_listfiles tags, file names user user names var user variables If {pat} is an empty string, then all the matches are returned. Otherwise only items matching {pat} are returned. See |wildcards| for the use of special characters in {pat}. If the optional {filtered} flag is set to 1, then 'wildignore' is applied to filter the results. Otherwise all the matches are returned. The 'wildignorecase' option always applies. If the 'wildoptions' option contains 'fuzzy', then fuzzy matching is used to get the completion matches. Otherwise regular expression matching is used. Thus this function follows the user preference, what happens on the command line. If you do not want this you can make 'wildoptions' empty before calling getcompletion() and restore it afterwards. If {type} is "cmdline", then the |cmdline-completion| result is returned. For example, to complete the possible values after a ":call" command: > echo getcompletion('call ', 'cmdline') < If there are no matches, an empty list is returned. An invalid value for {type} produces an error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPattern()->getcompletion('color') < *getcurpos()* getcurpos([{winid}]) Get the position of the cursor. This is like getpos('.'), but includes an extra "curswant" item in the list: [0, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~ The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the cursor vertically. After |$| command it will be a very large number equal to |v:maxcol|. Also see |getcursorcharpos()| and |getpos()|. The first "bufnum" item is always zero. The byte position of the cursor is returned in 'col'. To get the character position, use |getcursorcharpos()|. The optional {winid} argument can specify the window. It can be the window number or the |window-ID|. The last known cursor position is returned, this may be invalid for the current value of the buffer if it is not the current window. If {winid} is invalid a list with zeroes is returned. This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: > let save_cursor = getcurpos() MoveTheCursorAround call setpos('.', save_cursor) < Note that this only works within the window. See |winrestview()| for restoring more state. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->getcurpos() < *getcursorcharpos()* getcursorcharpos([{winid}]) Same as |getcurpos()| but the column number in the returned List is a character index instead of a byte index. Example: With the cursor on '보' in line 3 with text "여보세요": > getcursorcharpos() returns [0, 3, 2, 0, 3] getcurpos() returns [0, 3, 4, 0, 3] < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->getcursorcharpos() < *getcwd()* getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) The result is a String, which is the name of the current working directory. 'autochdir' is ignored. With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window in the current tab page. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. If {winnr} is -1 return the name of the global working directory. See also |haslocaldir()|. With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of the window in the specified tab page. If {winnr} is -1 return the working directory of the tabpage. If {winnr} is zero use the current window, if {tabnr} is zero use the current tabpage. Without any arguments, return the actual working directory of the current window. Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid. Examples: > " Get the working directory of the current window :echo getcwd() :echo getcwd(0) :echo getcwd(0, 0) " Get the working directory of window 3 in tabpage 2 :echo getcwd(3, 2) " Get the global working directory :echo getcwd(-1) " Get the working directory of tabpage 3 :echo getcwd(-1, 3) " Get the working directory of current tabpage :echo getcwd(-1, 0) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->getcwd() getenv({name}) *getenv()* Return the value of environment variable {name}. The {name} argument is a string, without a leading '$'. Example: > myHome = getenv('HOME') < When the variable does not exist |v:null| is returned. That is different from a variable set to an empty string, although some systems interpret the empty value as the variable being deleted. See also |expr-env|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetVarname()->getenv() getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()* Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group |hl-Normal|. With an argument a check is done whether String {name} is a valid font name. If not then an empty string is returned. Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the GUI does not support obtaining the real name. Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this function just after the GUI has started. Note that the GTK GUI accepts any font name, thus checking for a valid name does not work. getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()* The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute permissions of the given file {fname}. If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an empty string is returned. The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users. If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this is replaced with the string "-". Examples: > :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd") :echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc")) < This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->getfperm() < For setting permissions use |setfperm()|. getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()* The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the given file {fname}. If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned. If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned. If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2 is returned. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->getfsize() getftime({fname}) *getftime()* The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also |localtime()| and |strftime()|. If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->getftime() getftype({fname}) *getftype()* The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of file of the given file {fname}. If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned. Here is a table over different kinds of files and their results: Normal file "file" Directory "dir" Symbolic link "link" Block device "bdev" Character device "cdev" Socket "socket" FIFO "fifo" All other "other" Example: > getftype("/home") < Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and "file" are returned. On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a directory returns "dir" instead of "link". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->getftype() getimstatus() *getimstatus()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when the IME status is active and |FALSE| otherwise. See 'imstatusfunc'. getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *getjumplist()* Returns the |jumplist| for the specified window. Without arguments use the current window. With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page. {winnr} can also be a |window-ID|. With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab page. If {winnr} or {tabnr} is invalid, an empty list is returned. The returned list contains two entries: a list with the jump locations and the last used jump position number in the list. Each entry in the jump location list is a dictionary with the following entries: bufnr buffer number col column number coladd column offset for 'virtualedit' filename filename if available lnum line number Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->getjumplist() < *getline()* getline({lnum} [, {end}]) Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum} from the current buffer. Example: > getline(1) < When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a digit, |line()| is called to translate the String into a Number. To get the line under the cursor: > getline(".") < When {lnum} is a number smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned. When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end}, including line {end}. {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}. Non-existing lines are silently omitted. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned. Example: > :let start = line('.') :let end = search("^$") - 1 :let lines = getline(start, end) < Can also be used as a |method|: > ComputeLnum()->getline() < To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()| and |getbufoneline()| getloclist({nr} [, {what}]) *getloclist()* Returns a |List| with all the entries in the location list for window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location list window, the displayed location list is returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|. If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then returns the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. Refer to |getqflist()| for the supported items in {what}. In addition to the items supported by |getqflist()| in {what}, the following item is supported by |getloclist()|: filewinid id of the window used to display files from the location list. This field is applicable only when called from a location list window. See |location-list-file-window| for more details. Returns a |Dictionary| with default values if there is no location list for the window {nr}. Returns an empty Dictionary if window {nr} does not exist. Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): > :echo getloclist(3, {'all': 0}) :echo getloclist(5, {'filewinid': 0}) getmarklist([{buf}]) *getmarklist()* Without the {buf} argument returns a |List| with information about all the global marks. |mark| If the optional {buf} argument is specified, returns the local marks defined in buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|. If {buf} is invalid, an empty list is returned. Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following: mark name of the mark prefixed by "'" pos a |List| with the position of the mark: [bufnum, lnum, col, off] Refer to |getpos()| for more information. file file name Refer to |getpos()| for getting information about a specific mark. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->getmarklist() getmatches([{win}]) *getmatches()* Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined for the current window by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. |getmatches()| is useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()| can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or window ID instead of the current window. If {win} is invalid, an empty list is returned. Example: > :echo getmatches() < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > :let m = getmatches() :call clearmatches() :echo getmatches() < [] > :call setmatches(m) :echo getmatches() < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > :unlet m < getmousepos() *getmousepos()* Returns a |Dictionary| with the last known position of the mouse. This can be used in a mapping for a mouse click or in a filter of a popup window. The items are: screenrow screen row screencol screen column winid Window ID of the click winrow row inside "winid" wincol column inside "winid" line text line inside "winid" column text column inside "winid" coladd offset (in screen columns) from the start of the clicked char All numbers are 1-based. If not over a window, e.g. when in the command line, then only "screenrow" and "screencol" are valid, the others are zero. When on the status line below a window or the vertical separator right of a window, the "line" and "column" values are zero. When the position is after the text then "column" is the length of the text in bytes plus one. If the mouse is over a popup window then that window is used. When using |getchar()| the Vim variables |v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_col| and |v:mouse_winid| also provide these values. getmouseshape() *getmouseshape()* Returns the name of the currently showing mouse pointer. When the |+mouseshape| feature is not supported or the shape is unknown an empty string is returned. This function is mainly intended for testing. *getpid()* getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process. On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim exits. *getpos()* getpos({expr}) Get the position for String {expr}. For possible values of {expr} see |line()|. For getting the cursor position see |getcurpos()|. The result is a |List| with four numbers: [bufnum, lnum, col, off] "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it is the buffer number of the mark. "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first column is 1. The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last character. Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V" (visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of '> is a large number equal to |v:maxcol|. The column number in the returned List is the byte position within the line. To get the character position in the line, use |getcharpos()|. A very large column number equal to |v:maxcol| can be returned, in which case it means "after the end of the line". If {expr} is invalid, returns a list with all zeros. This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: > let save_a_mark = getpos("'a") ... call setpos("'a", save_a_mark) < Also see |getcharpos()|, |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMark()->getpos() getqflist([{what}]) *getqflist()* Returns a |List| with all the current quickfix errors. Each list item is a dictionary with these entries: bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use bufname() to get the name module module name lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1) end_lnum end of line number if the item is multiline col column number (first column is 1) end_col end of column number if the item has range vcol |TRUE|: "col" is visual column |FALSE|: "col" is byte index nr error number pattern search pattern used to locate the error text description of the error type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc. valid |TRUE|: recognized error message user_data custom data associated with the item, can be any type. When there is no error list or it's empty, an empty list is returned. Quickfix list entries with a non-existing buffer number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero (Note: some functions accept buffer number zero for the alternate buffer, you may need to explicitly check for zero). Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and do something with them: > :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c :for d in getqflist() : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text :endfor < If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The following string items are supported in {what}: changedtick get the total number of changes made to the list |quickfix-changedtick| context get the |quickfix-context| efm errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If not present, then the 'errorformat' option value is used. id get information for the quickfix list with |quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the current list or the list specified by "nr" idx get information for the quickfix entry at this index in the list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to zero, then uses the current entry. See |quickfix-index| items quickfix list entries lines parse a list of lines using 'efm' and return the resulting entries. Only a |List| type is accepted. The current quickfix list is not modified. See |quickfix-parse|. nr get information for this quickfix list; zero means the current quickfix list and "$" means the last quickfix list qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix window. Returns 0 if the quickfix buffer is not present. See |quickfix-buffer|. size number of entries in the quickfix list title get the list title |quickfix-title| winid get the quickfix |window-ID| all all of the above quickfix properties Non-string items in {what} are ignored. To get the value of a particular item, set it to zero. If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used. If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list specified by "id" is used. To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to "$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary contains the quickfix stack size. When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm" are ignored. The returned dictionary contains the entry "items" with the list of entries. The returned dictionary contains the following entries: changedtick total number of changes made to the list |quickfix-changedtick| context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context| If not present, set to "". id quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|. If not present, set to 0. idx index of the quickfix entry in the list. If not present, set to 0. items quickfix list entries. If not present, set to an empty list. nr quickfix list number. If not present, set to 0 qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix window. If not present, set to 0. size number of entries in the quickfix list. If not present, set to 0. title quickfix list title text. If not present, set to "". winid quickfix |window-ID|. If not present, set to 0 Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): > :echo getqflist({'all': 1}) :echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1}) :echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]}) < getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]]) *getreg()* The result is a String, which is the contents of register {regname}. Example: > :let cliptext = getreg('*') < When register {regname} was not set the result is an empty string. The {regname} argument must be a string. *E1162* getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression register. (For use in maps.) getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra argument is ignored, thus you can always give it. If {list} is present and |TRUE|, the result type is changed to |List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs (see |NL-used-for-Nul|). When the register was not set an empty list is returned. If {regname} is "", the unnamed register '"' is used. If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRegname()->getreg() getreginfo([{regname}]) *getreginfo()* Returns detailed information about register {regname} as a Dictionary with the following entries: regcontents List of lines contained in register {regname}, like |getreg|({regname}, 1, 1). regtype the type of register {regname}, as in |getregtype()|. isunnamed Boolean flag, v:true if this register is currently pointed to by the unnamed register. points_to for the unnamed register, gives the single letter name of the register currently pointed to (see |quotequote|). For example, after deleting a line with `dd`, this field will be "1", which is the register that got the deleted text. The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is invalid or not set, an empty Dictionary will be returned. If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used. If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. The returned Dictionary can be passed to |setreg()|. In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRegname()->getreginfo() getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()* The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}. The value will be one of: "v" for |characterwise| text "V" for |linewise| text "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text "" for an empty or unknown register <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16. The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is "", the unnamed register '"' is used. If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRegname()->getregtype() getscriptinfo([{opts}]) *getscriptinfo()* Returns a |List| with information about all the sourced Vim scripts in the order they were sourced, like what `:scriptnames` shows. The optional Dict argument {opts} supports the following optional items: name Script name match pattern. If specified, and "sid" is not specified, information about scripts with a name that match the pattern "name" are returned. sid Script ID |<SID>|. If specified, only information about the script with ID "sid" is returned and "name" is ignored. Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following items: autoload Set to TRUE for a script that was used with `import autoload` but was not actually sourced yet (see |import-autoload|). functions List of script-local function names defined in the script. Present only when a particular script is specified using the "sid" item in {opts}. name Vim script file name. sid Script ID |<SID>|. sourced Script ID of the actually sourced script that this script name links to, if any, otherwise zero variables A dictionary with the script-local variables. Present only when a particular script is specified using the "sid" item in {opts}. Note that this is a copy, the value of script-local variables cannot be changed using this dictionary. version Vim script version (|scriptversion|) Examples: > :echo getscriptinfo({'name': 'myscript'}) :echo getscriptinfo({'sid': 15}).variables < gettabinfo([{tabnr}]) *gettabinfo()* If {tabnr} is not specified, then information about all the tab pages is returned as a |List|. Each List item is a |Dictionary|. Otherwise, {tabnr} specifies the tab page number and information about that one is returned. If the tab page does not exist an empty List is returned. Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries: tabnr tab page number. variables a reference to the dictionary with tabpage-local variables windows List of |window-ID|s in the tab page. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabnr()->gettabinfo() gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabvar()* Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page {tabnr}. |t:var| Tabs are numbered starting with one. The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all tab-local variables is returned. Note that the name without "t:" must be used. When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty string is returned, there is no error message. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabnr()->gettabvar(varname) gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabwinvar()* Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}. The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local variables is returned. When {varname} is equal to "&" get the values of all window-local options in a |Dictionary|. Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a window-local option. Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:". Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage use |getwinvar()|. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable or buffer-local variable. When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty string is returned, there is no error message. Examples: > :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list') :echo "myvar = " .. gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar') < To obtain all window-local variables use: > gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, '&') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabnr()->gettabwinvar(winnr, varname) gettagstack([{winnr}]) *gettagstack()* The result is a Dict, which is the tag stack of window {winnr}. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {winnr} is not specified, the current window is used. When window {winnr} doesn't exist, an empty Dict is returned. The returned dictionary contains the following entries: curidx Current index in the stack. When at top of the stack, set to (length + 1). Index of bottom of the stack is 1. items List of items in the stack. Each item is a dictionary containing the entries described below. length Number of entries in the stack. Each item in the stack is a dictionary with the following entries: bufnr buffer number of the current jump from cursor position before the tag jump. See |getpos()| for the format of the returned list. matchnr current matching tag number. Used when multiple matching tags are found for a name. tagname name of the tag See |tagstack| for more information about the tag stack. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->gettagstack() gettext({text}) *gettext()* Translate String {text} if possible. This is mainly for use in the distributed Vim scripts. When generating message translations the {text} is extracted by xgettext, the translator can add the translated message in the .po file and Vim will lookup the translation when gettext() is called. For {text} double quoted strings are preferred, because xgettext does not understand escaping in single quoted strings. getwininfo([{winid}]) *getwininfo()* Returns information about windows as a |List| with Dictionaries. If {winid} is given Information about the window with that ID is returned, as a |List| with one item. If the window does not exist the result is an empty list. Without {winid} information about all the windows in all the tab pages is returned. Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries: botline last complete displayed buffer line bufnr number of buffer in the window height window height (excluding winbar) loclist 1 if showing a location list {only with the +quickfix feature} quickfix 1 if quickfix or location list window {only with the +quickfix feature} terminal 1 if a terminal window {only with the +terminal feature} tabnr tab page number topline first displayed buffer line variables a reference to the dictionary with window-local variables width window width winbar 1 if the window has a toolbar, 0 otherwise wincol leftmost screen column of the window; "col" from |win_screenpos()| textoff number of columns occupied by any 'foldcolumn', 'signcolumn' and line number in front of the text winid |window-ID| winnr window number winrow topmost screen line of the window; "row" from |win_screenpos()| Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->getwininfo() getwinpos([{timeout}]) *getwinpos()* The result is a |List| with two numbers, the result of |getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()| combined: [x-pos, y-pos] {timeout} can be used to specify how long to wait in msec for a response from the terminal. When omitted 100 msec is used. Use a longer time for a remote terminal. When using a value less than 10 and no response is received within that time, a previously reported position is returned, if available. This can be used to poll for the position and do some work in the meantime: > while 1 let res = getwinpos(1) if res[0] >= 0 break endif " Do some work here endwhile < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTimeout()->getwinpos() < *getwinposx()* getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec). The result will be -1 if the information is not available (e.g. on the Wayland backend). The value can be used with `:winpos`. *getwinposy()* getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of the top of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec). The result will be -1 if the information is not available (e.g. on the Wayland backend). The value can be used with `:winpos`. getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getwinvar()* Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage. Examples: > :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list') :echo "myvar = " .. getwinvar(1, 'myvar') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->getwinvar(varname) < glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) *glob()* Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the use of special characters. Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|, the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. 'wildignorecase' always applies. When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List| with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List. You can also use |readdir()| if you need to do complicated things, such as limiting the number of matches. A name for a non-existing file is not included. A symbolic link is only included if it points to an existing file. However, when the {alllinks} argument is present and it is |TRUE| then all symbolic links are included. For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from any external command. Example: > :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`") :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g") < The result of the program inside the backticks should be one item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed. See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->glob() glob2regpat({string}) *glob2regpat()* Convert a file pattern, as used by glob(), into a search pattern. The result can be used to match with a string that is a file name. E.g. > if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak') < This is equivalent to: > if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$' < When {string} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an empty string. Note that the result depends on the system. On MS-Windows a backslash usually means a path separator. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->glob2regpat() < *globpath()* globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) Perform glob() for String {expr} on all directories in {path} and concatenate the results. Example: > :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim") < {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed. To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it. If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no error message. Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|, the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List| with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. Example: > :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1) < {alllinks} is used as with |glob()|. The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories in 'runtimepath' and below: > :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt") < Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetExpr()->globpath(&rtp) < *has()* has({feature} [, {check}]) When {check} is omitted or is zero: The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is supported, zero otherwise. The {feature} argument is a string, case is ignored. See |feature-list| below. When {check} is present and not zero: The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} could ever be supported, zero otherwise. This is useful to check for a typo in {feature} and to detect dead code. Keep in mind that an older Vim version will not know about a feature added later and features that have been abandoned will not be known by the current Vim version. Also see |exists()| and |exists_compiled()|. Note that to skip code that has a syntax error when the feature is not available, Vim may skip the rest of the line and miss a following `endif`. Therefore put the `endif` on a separate line: > if has('feature') let x = this->breaks->without->the->feature endif < If the `endif` would be moved to the second line as "| endif" it would not be found. has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()* The result is a Number, which is TRUE if |Dictionary| {dict} has an entry with key {key}. FALSE otherwise. The {key} argument is a string. In |Vim9| script a number is also accepted (and converted to a string) but no other types. In legacy script the usual automatic conversion to string is done. Can also be used as a |method|: > mydict->has_key(key) haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *haslocaldir()* The result is a Number: 1 when the window has set a local directory via |:lcd| 2 when the tab-page has set a local directory via |:tcd| 0 otherwise. Without arguments use the current window. With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page. With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab page. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. If {winnr} is -1 it is ignored and only the tabpage is used. Return 0 if the arguments are invalid. Examples: > if haslocaldir() == 1 " window local directory case elseif haslocaldir() == 2 " tab-local directory case else " global directory case endif " current window :echo haslocaldir() :echo haslocaldir(0) :echo haslocaldir(0, 0) " window n in current tab page :echo haslocaldir(n) :echo haslocaldir(n, 0) " window n in tab page m :echo haslocaldir(n, m) " tab page m :echo haslocaldir(-1, m) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->haslocaldir() hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()* The result is a Number, which is TRUE if there is a mapping that contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to) and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by {mode}. The arguments {what} and {mode} are strings. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or Command-line mode. Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current buffer are checked for a match. If no matching mapping is found FALSE is returned. The following characters are recognized in {mode}: n Normal mode v Visual and Select mode x Visual mode s Select mode o Operator-pending mode i Insert mode l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.) c Command-line mode When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used. This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists to a function in a Vim script. Example: > :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit') : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit :endif < This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't already a mapping to "\ABCdoit". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRHS()->hasmapto() histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()* Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be one of: *hist-names* "cmd" or ":" command line history "search" or "/" search pattern history "expr" or "=" typed expression history "input" or "@" input line history "debug" or ">" debug command history empty the current or last used history The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one character is sufficient. If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be shifted to become the newest entry. The result is a Number: TRUE if the operation was successful, otherwise FALSE is returned. Example: > :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d")) :let date=input("Enter date: ") < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetHistory()->histadd('search') histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()* Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}. If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a regular expression. All entries matching that expression will be removed from the history (if there are any). Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|. If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will be removed if it exists. The result is TRUE for a successful operation, otherwise FALSE is returned. Examples: Clear expression register history: > :call histdel("expr") < Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: > :call histdel("/", '^\*') < The following three are equivalent: > :call histdel("search", histnr("search")) :call histdel("search", -1) :call histdel("search", '^' .. histget("search", -1) .. '$') < To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for the "n" command and 'hlsearch': > :call histdel("search", -1) :let @/ = histget("search", -1) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetHistory()->histdel() histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()* The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is omitted, the most recent item from the history is used. Examples: Redo the second last search from history. > :execute '/' .. histget("search", -2) < Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. > :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetHistory()->histget() histnr({history}) *histnr()* The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}. If an error occurred, -1 is returned. Example: > :let inp_index = histnr("expr") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetHistory()->histnr() < hlexists({name}) *hlexists()* The result is a Number, which is TRUE if a highlight group called {name} exists. This is when the group has been defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax item. *highlight_exists()* Obsolete name: highlight_exists(). Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->hlexists() < hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) *hlget()* Returns a List of all the highlight group attributes. If the optional {name} is specified, then returns a List with only the attributes of the specified highlight group. Returns an empty List if the highlight group {name} is not present. If the optional {resolve} argument is set to v:true and the highlight group {name} is linked to another group, then the link is resolved recursively and the attributes of the resolved highlight group are returned. Each entry in the returned List is a Dictionary with the following items: cleared boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight group attributes are cleared or not yet specified. See |highlight-clear|. cterm cterm attributes. See |highlight-cterm|. ctermbg cterm background color. See |highlight-ctermbg|. ctermfg cterm foreground color. See |highlight-ctermfg|. ctermul cterm underline color. See |highlight-ctermul|. default boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight group link is a default link. See |highlight-default|. font highlight group font. See |highlight-font|. gui gui attributes. See |highlight-gui|. guibg gui background color. See |highlight-guibg|. guifg gui foreground color. See |highlight-guifg|. guisp gui special color. See |highlight-guisp|. id highlight group ID. linksto linked highlight group name. See |:highlight-link|. name highlight group name. See |group-name|. start start terminal keycode. See |highlight-start|. stop stop terminal keycode. See |highlight-stop|. term term attributes. See |highlight-term|. The 'term', 'cterm' and 'gui' items in the above Dictionary have a dictionary value with the following optional boolean items: 'bold', 'standout', 'underline', 'undercurl', 'italic', 'reverse', 'inverse' and 'strikethrough'. Example(s): > :echo hlget() :echo hlget('ModeMsg') :echo hlget('Number', v:true) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->hlget() < hlset({list}) *hlset()* Creates or modifies the attributes of a List of highlight groups. Each item in {list} is a dictionary containing the attributes of a highlight group. See |hlget()| for the list of supported items in this dictionary. In addition to the items described in |hlget()|, the following additional items are supported in the dictionary: force boolean flag to force the creation of a link for an existing highlight group with attributes. The highlight group is identified using the 'name' item and the 'id' item (if supplied) is ignored. If a highlight group with a specified name doesn't exist, then it is created. Otherwise the attributes of an existing highlight group are modified. If an empty dictionary value is used for the 'term' or 'cterm' or 'gui' entries, then the corresponding attributes are cleared. If the 'cleared' item is set to v:true, then all the attributes of the highlight group are cleared. The 'linksto' item can be used to link a highlight group to another highlight group. See |:highlight-link|. Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. Example(s): > " add bold attribute to the Visual highlight group :call hlset([#{name: 'Visual', \ term: #{reverse: 1 , bold: 1}}]) :call hlset([#{name: 'Type', guifg: 'DarkGreen'}]) :let l = hlget() :call hlset(l) " clear the Search highlight group :call hlset([#{name: 'Search', cleared: v:true}]) " clear the 'term' attributes for a highlight group :call hlset([#{name: 'Title', term: {}}]) " create the MyHlg group linking it to DiffAdd :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'DiffAdd'}]) " remove the MyHlg group link :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'NONE'}]) " clear the attributes and a link :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', cleared: v:true, \ linksto: 'NONE'}]) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetAttrList()->hlset() < *hlID()* hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist, zero is returned. This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight group. For example, to get the background color of the "Comment" group: > :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg") < *highlightID()* Obsolete name: highlightID(). Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->hlID() hostname() *hostname()* The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than 256 characters long are truncated. iconv({string}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()* The result is a String, which is the text {string} converted from encoding {from} to encoding {to}. When the conversion completely fails an empty string is returned. When some characters could not be converted they are replaced with "?". The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv". Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back can be done. This can be used to display messages with special characters, no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in UTF-8 and use: > echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc) < Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->iconv('latin1', 'utf-8') < *indent()* indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an error is given. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->indent() index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* Find {expr} in {object} and return its index. See |indexof()| for using a lambda to select the item. If {object} is a |List| return the lowest index where the item has a value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case matters as indicated by the {ic} argument. If {object} is |Blob| return the lowest index where the byte value is equal to {expr}. If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end). When {ic} is given and it is |TRUE|, ignore case. Otherwise case must match. -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {object}. Example: > :let idx = index(words, "the") :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetObject()->index(what) indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]) *indexof()* Returns the index of an item in {object} where {expr} is v:true. {object} must be a |List| or a |Blob|. If {object} is a |List|, evaluate {expr} for each item in the List until the expression is v:true and return the index of this item. If {object} is a |Blob| evaluate {expr} for each byte in the Blob until the expression is v:true and return the index of this byte. {expr} must be a |string| or |Funcref|. If {expr} is a |string|: If {object} is a |List|, inside {expr} |v:key| has the index of the current List item and |v:val| has the value of the item. If {object} is a |Blob|, inside {expr} |v:key| has the index of the current byte and |v:val| has the byte value. If {expr} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments: 1. the key or the index of the current item. 2. the value of the current item. The function must return |TRUE| if the item is found and the search should stop. The optional argument {opts} is a Dict and supports the following items: startidx start evaluating {expr} at the item with this index; may be negative for an item relative to the end Returns -1 when {expr} evaluates to v:false for all the items. Example: > :let l = [#{n: 10}, #{n: 20}, #{n: 30}] :echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20") :echo indexof(l, {i, v -> v.n == 30}) :echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20", #{startidx: 1}) < Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->indexof(expr) input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used in the prompt to start a new line. The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt. The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history for lines typed for input(). Example: > :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer" : echo "Cheers!" :endif < If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this. Example: > :let color = input("Color? ", "white") < The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of completion supported for the input. Without it completion is not performed. The supported completion types are the same as that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for more information. Example: > let fname = input("File: ", "", "file") < NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI). Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a mapping is handled like the characters were typed. Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()| after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using |:execute| or |:normal|. Example with a mapping: > :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" .. Foo<CR> :function GetFoo() : call inputsave() : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ") : call inputrestore() :endfunction < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPrompt()->input() inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()* Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. Example: > :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth()) :if n != "" : let &sw = n :endif < When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When omitted an empty string is returned. Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button. NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPrompt()->inputdialog() inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to enter a number, which is returned. The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the mouse, if the mouse is enabled in the command line ('mouse' is "a" or includes "c"). For the first string 0 is returned. When clicking above the first item a negative number is returned. When clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist} is returned. Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item. Example: > let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red', \ '2. green', '3. blue']) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetChoices()->inputlist() inputrestore() *inputrestore()* Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|. Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is called. Calling it more often is harmless though. Returns TRUE when there is nothing to restore, FALSE otherwise. inputsave() *inputsave()* Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can be used several times, in which case there must be just as many inputrestore() calls. Returns TRUE when out of memory, FALSE otherwise. inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()* This function acts much like the |input()| function with but two exceptions: a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input |history| stack. The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt. NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPrompt()->inputsecret() insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()* When {object} is a |List| or a |Blob| insert {item} at the start of it. If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item. Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: > :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1) :call insert(mylist, 4, -1) :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist)) < The last example can be done simpler with |add()|. Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->insert(item) < *instanceof()* *E614* *E616* *E693* instanceof({object}, {class}) The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when the {object} argument is a direct or indirect instance of a |Class|, |Interface|, or class |:type| alias specified by {class}. If {class} is varargs, the function returns |TRUE| when {object} is an instance of any of the specified classes. Example: > instanceof(animal, Dog, Cat) < Can also be used as a |method|: > myobj->instanceof(mytype) interrupt() *interrupt()* Interrupt script execution. It works more or less like the user typing CTRL-C, most commands won't execute and control returns to the user. This is useful to abort execution from lower down, e.g. in an autocommand. Example: > :function s:check_typoname(file) : if fnamemodify(a:file, ':t') == '[' : echomsg 'Maybe typo' : call interrupt() : endif :endfunction :au BufWritePre * call s:check_typoname(expand('<amatch>')) invert({expr}) *invert()* Bitwise invert. The argument is converted to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Example: > :let bits = invert(bits) < Can also be used as a |method|: > :let bits = bits->invert() isabsolutepath({path}) *isabsolutepath()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {path} is an absolute path. On Unix, a path is considered absolute when it starts with '/'. On MS-Windows, it is considered absolute when it starts with an optional drive prefix and is followed by a '\' or '/'. UNC paths are always absolute. Example: > echo isabsolutepath('/usr/share/') " 1 echo isabsolutepath('./foobar') " 0 echo isabsolutepath('C:\Windows') " 1 echo isabsolutepath('foobar') " 0 echo isabsolutepath('\\remote\file') " 1 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->isabsolutepath() isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a directory with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't exist, or isn't a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {directory} is any expression, which is used as a String. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->isdirectory() isinf({expr}) *isinf()* Return 1 if {expr} is a positive infinity, or -1 a negative infinity, otherwise 0. > :echo isinf(1.0 / 0.0) < 1 > :echo isinf(-1.0 / 0.0) < -1 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->isinf() islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786* The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {expr} is the name of a locked variable. The string argument {expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! Example: > :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3] :lockvar 1 alist :echo islocked('alist') " 1 :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0 < When {expr} is a variable that does not exist -1 is returned. If {expr} uses a range, list or dict index that is out of range or does not exist you get an error message. Use |exists()| to check for existence. In Vim9 script it does not work for local function variables. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->islocked() isnan({expr}) *isnan()* Return |TRUE| if {expr} is a float with value NaN. > echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0) < 1 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->isnan() items({dict}) *items()* Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict} entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary order. Also see |keys()| and |values()|. Example: > for [key, value] in items(mydict) echo key .. ': ' .. value endfor < A List or a String argument is also supported. In these cases, items() returns a List with the index and the value at the index. Can also be used as a |method|: > mydict->items() job_ functions are documented here: |job-functions-details| join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()* Join the items in {list} together into one String. When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If {sep} is omitted a single space is used. Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to add it there too: > let lines = join(mylist, "\n") .. "\n" < String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are converted into a string like with |string()|. The opposite function is |split()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->join() js_decode({string}) *js_decode()* This is similar to |json_decode()| with these differences: - Object key names do not have to be in quotes. - Strings can be in single quotes. - Empty items in an array (between two commas) are allowed and result in v:none items. Can also be used as a |method|: > ReadObject()->js_decode() js_encode({expr}) *js_encode()* This is similar to |json_encode()| with these differences: - Object key names are not in quotes. - v:none items in an array result in an empty item between commas. For example, the Vim object: [1,v:none,{"one":1},v:none] ~ Will be encoded as: [1,,{one:1},,] ~ While json_encode() would produce: [1,null,{"one":1},null] ~ This encoding is valid for JavaScript. It is more efficient than JSON, especially when using an array with optional items. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetObject()->js_encode() json_decode({string}) *json_decode()* *E491* This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent in Vim values. See |json_encode()| for the relation between JSON and Vim values. The decoding is permissive: - A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored, e.g. "[1, 2, ]" is the same as "[1, 2]". - Integer keys are accepted in objects, e.g. {1:2} is the same as {"1":2}. - More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for "1.0", or "001.2" for "1.2". Special floating point values "Infinity", "-Infinity" and "NaN" (capitalization ignored) are accepted. - Leading zeroes in integer numbers are ignored, e.g. "012" for "12" or "-012" for "-12". - Capitalization is ignored in literal names null, true or false, e.g. "NULL" for "null", "True" for "true". - Control characters U+0000 through U+001F which are not escaped in strings are accepted, e.g. " " (tab character in string) for "\t". - An empty JSON expression or made of only spaces is accepted and results in v:none. - Backslash in an invalid 2-character sequence escape is ignored, e.g. "\a" is decoded as "a". - A correct surrogate pair in JSON strings should normally be a 12 character sequence such as "\uD834\uDD1E", but json_decode() silently accepts truncated surrogate pairs such as "\uD834" or "\uD834\u" *E938* A duplicate key in an object, valid in rfc7159, is not accepted by json_decode() as the result must be a valid Vim type, e.g. this fails: {"a":"b", "a":"c"} Can also be used as a |method|: > ReadObject()->json_decode() json_encode({expr}) *json_encode()* Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string. The encoding is specified in: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html Vim values are converted as follows: *E1161* |Number| decimal number |Float| floating point number Float nan "NaN" Float inf "Infinity" Float -inf "-Infinity" |String| in double quotes (possibly null) |Funcref| not possible, error |List| as an array (possibly null); when used recursively: [] |Dict| as an object (possibly null); when used recursively: {} |Blob| as an array of the individual bytes v:false "false" v:true "true" v:none "null" v:null "null" Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values. This is missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do allow it. If not then you will get an error. If a string contains an illegal character then the replacement character 0xfffd is used. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetObject()->json_encode() keys({dict}) *keys()* Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |values()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mydict->keys() keytrans({string}) *keytrans()* Turn the internal byte representation of keys into a form that can be used for |:map|. E.g. > :let xx = "\<C-Home>" :echo keytrans(xx) < <C-Home> Can also be used as a |method|: > "\<C-Home>"->keytrans() < *len()* *E701* len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument. When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is used, as with |strlen()|. When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is returned. When {expr} is a |Blob| the number of bytes is returned. When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the |Dictionary| is returned. Otherwise an error is given and returns zero. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->len() < *libcall()* *E364* *E368* libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname} with single argument {argument}. This is useful to call functions in a library that you especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument is possible, calling standard library functions is rather limited. The result is the String returned by the function. If the function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string "" to Vim. If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()! If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a null-terminated string. This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will very probably crash. For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer, and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work, it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded. WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may crash! This also happens if the function returns a number, because Vim thinks it's a pointer. For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if the DLL is not in the usual places. For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC'). {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| feature is present} Examples: > :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME") < Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetValue()->libcall("libc.so", "getenv") < *libcallnr()* libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an int instead of a string. {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| feature is present} Examples: > :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "") :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n") :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10) < Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetValue()->libcallnr("libc.so", "printf") < line({expr} [, {winid}]) *line()* The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file position given with {expr}. The {expr} argument is a string. The accepted positions are: *E1209* . the cursor position $ the last line in the current buffer 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is returned) w0 first line visible in current window (one if the display isn't updated, e.g. in silent Ex mode) w$ last line visible in current window (this is one less than "w0" if no lines are visible) v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in that it's updated right away. Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number then applies to another buffer. To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use |getpos()|. With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for that window instead of the current window. Returns 0 for invalid values of {expr} and {winid}. Examples: > line(".") line number of the cursor line(".", winid) idem, in window "winid" line("'t") line number of mark t line("'" .. marker) line number of mark marker < To jump to the last known position when opening a file see |last-position-jump|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetValue()->line() line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()* Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored. This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just below the last line: > line2byte(line("$") + 1) < This is the buffer size plus one. If 'fileencoding' is empty it is the file size plus one. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been disabled at compile time, -1 is returned. Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->line2byte() lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()* Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp indenting rules, as with 'lisp'. The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an error is given. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->lispindent() list2blob({list}) *list2blob()* Return a Blob concatenating all the number values in {list}. Examples: > list2blob([1, 2, 3, 4]) returns 0z01020304 list2blob([]) returns 0z < Returns an empty Blob on error. If one of the numbers is negative or more than 255 error *E1239* is given. |blob2list()| does the opposite. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetList()->list2blob() list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) *list2str()* Convert each number in {list} to a character string can concatenate them all. Examples: > list2str([32]) returns " " list2str([65, 66, 67]) returns "ABC" < The same can be done (slowly) with: > join(map(list, {nr, val -> nr2char(val)}), '') < |str2list()| does the opposite. When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters. With UTF-8 composing characters work as expected: > list2str([97, 769]) returns "á" < Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetList()->list2str() listener_add({callback} [, {buf}]) *listener_add()* Add a callback function that will be invoked when changes have been made to buffer {buf}. {buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used. Returns a unique ID that can be passed to |listener_remove()|. The {callback} is invoked with five arguments: bufnr the buffer that was changed start first changed line number end first line number below the change added number of lines added, negative if lines were deleted changes a List of items with details about the changes Example: > func Listener(bufnr, start, end, added, changes) echo 'lines ' .. a:start .. ' until ' .. a:end .. ' changed' endfunc call listener_add('Listener', bufnr) < The List cannot be changed. Each item in "changes" is a dictionary with these entries: lnum the first line number of the change end the first line below the change added number of lines added; negative if lines were deleted col first column in "lnum" that was affected by the change; one if unknown or the whole line was affected; this is a byte index, first character has a value of one. When lines are inserted (not when a line is split, e.g. by typing CR in Insert mode) the values are: lnum line above which the new line is added end equal to "lnum" added number of lines inserted col 1 When lines are deleted the values are: lnum the first deleted line end the line below the first deleted line, before the deletion was done added negative, number of lines deleted col 1 When lines are changed: lnum the first changed line end the line below the last changed line added 0 col first column with a change or 1 The entries are in the order the changes were made, thus the most recent change is at the end. The line numbers are valid when the callback is invoked, but later changes may make them invalid, thus keeping a copy for later might not work. The {callback} is invoked just before the screen is updated, when |listener_flush()| is called or when a change is being made that changes the line count in a way it causes a line number in the list of changes to become invalid. The {callback} is invoked with the text locked, see |textlock|. If you do need to make changes to the buffer, use a timer to do this later |timer_start()|. The {callback} is not invoked when the buffer is first loaded. Use the |BufReadPost| autocmd event to handle the initial text of a buffer. The {callback} is also not invoked when the buffer is unloaded, use the |BufUnload| autocmd event for that. Returns zero if {callback} or {buf} is invalid. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetBuffer()->listener_add(callback) listener_flush([{buf}]) *listener_flush()* Invoke listener callbacks for buffer {buf}. If there are no pending changes then no callbacks are invoked. {buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->listener_flush() listener_remove({id}) *listener_remove()* Remove a listener previously added with listener_add(). Returns FALSE when {id} could not be found, TRUE when {id} was removed. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetListenerId()->listener_remove() localtime() *localtime()* Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan 1970. See also |strftime()|, |strptime()| and |getftime()|. log({expr}) *log()* Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range (0, inf]. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo log(10) < 2.302585 > :echo log(exp(5)) < 5.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->log() log10({expr}) *log10()* Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo log10(1000) < 3.0 > :echo log10(0.01) < -2.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->log10() luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) *luaeval()* Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}. Strings are returned as they are. Boolean objects are converted to numbers. Numbers are converted to |Float| values. Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned as-is. Other objects are returned as zero without any errors. See |lua-luaeval| for more details. Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->luaeval() < {only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature} map({expr1}, {expr2}) *map()* {expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|. When {expr1} is a |List| or |Dictionary|, replace each item in {expr1} with the result of evaluating {expr2}. For a |Blob| each byte is replaced. For a |String|, each character, including composing characters, is replaced. If the item type changes you may want to use |mapnew()| to create a new List or Dictionary. This is required when using Vim9 script. {expr2} must be a |String| or |Funcref|. If {expr2} is a |String|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the current character. Example: > :call map(mylist, '"> " .. v:val .. " <"') < This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist". Note that {expr2} is the result of an expression and is then used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You still have to double ' quotes If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it is called with two arguments: 1. The key or the index of the current item. 2. the value of the current item. With a legacy script lambda you don't get an error if it only accepts one argument, but with a Vim9 lambda you get "E1106: One argument too many", the number of arguments must match. The function must return the new value of the item. Example that changes each value by "key-value": > func KeyValue(key, val) return a:key .. '-' .. a:val endfunc call map(myDict, function('KeyValue')) < It is shorter when using a |lambda|: > call map(myDict, {key, val -> key .. '-' .. val}) < If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: > call map(myDict, {key -> 'item: ' .. key}) < If you do not use "key" you can use a short name: > call map(myDict, {_, val -> 'item: ' .. val}) < The operation is done in-place for a |List| and |Dictionary|. If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy first: > :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val .. "\t"') < Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered, or a new |Blob| or |String|. When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no further items in {expr1} are processed. When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, unless it was defined with the "abort" flag. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->map(expr2) maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()* When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command listing. When {dict} is TRUE a dictionary is returned, see below. To get a list of all mappings see |maplist()|. When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is returned if {dict} is FALSE, otherwise returns an empty Dict. When the mapping for {name} is empty, then "<Nop>" is returned. The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map" command. {mode} can be one of these strings: "n" Normal "v" Visual (including Select) "o" Operator-pending "i" Insert "c" Cmd-line "s" Select "x" Visual "l" langmap |language-mapping| "t" Terminal-Job "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations instead of mappings. When {dict} is there and it is |TRUE| return a dictionary containing all the information of the mapping with the following items: *mapping-dict* "lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping as it would be typed "lhsraw" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes "lhsrawalt" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes, alternate form, only present when it differs from "lhsraw" "rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed. "silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0. "noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable. "script" 1 if mapping was defined with <script>. "expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|). "buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|). "mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In addition to the modes mentioned above, these characters will be used: " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending "!" Insert and Commandline mode (|mapmode-ic|) "sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings (|<SID>|). Negative for special contexts. "scriptversion" The version of the script. 999999 for |Vim9| script. "lnum" The line number in "sid", zero if unknown. "nowait" Do not wait for other, longer mappings. (|:map-<nowait>|). "abbr" True if this is an abbreviation |abbreviations|. "mode_bits" Vim's internal binary representation of "mode". |mapset()| ignores this; only "mode" is used. See |maplist()| for usage examples. The values are from src/vim.h and may change in the future. The dictionary can be used to restore a mapping with |mapset()|. The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, then the global mappings. This function can be used to map a key even when it's already mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: > exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' .. maparg('<Tab>', 'n') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetKey()->maparg('n') mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()* Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in {name}. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations instead of mappings. A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}. matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~ mapcheck("a") yes yes yes mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes mapcheck("ax") yes no no mapcheck("b") no no no The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a mapping for {name} exactly. When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty String is returned. If there is one, the RHS of that mapping is returned. If there are several mappings that start with {name}, the RHS of one of them is returned. This will be "<Nop>" if the RHS is empty. The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, then the global mappings. This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added without being ambiguous. Example: > :if mapcheck("_vv") == "" : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR> :endif < This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetKey()->mapcheck('n') maplist([{abbr}]) *maplist()* Returns a |List| of all mappings. Each List item is a |Dict|, the same as what is returned by |maparg()|, see |mapping-dict|. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations instead of mappings. Example to show all mappings with 'MultiMatch' in rhs: > vim9script echo maplist()->filter( (_, m) => match(m.rhs, 'MultiMatch') >= 0) < It can be tricky to find mappings for particular |:map-modes|. |mapping-dict|'s "mode_bits" can simplify this. For example, the mode_bits for Normal, Insert or Command-line modes are 0x19. To find all the mappings available in those modes you can do: > vim9script var saved_maps = [] for m in maplist() if and(m.mode_bits, 0x19) != 0 saved_maps->add(m) endif endfor echo saved_maps->mapnew((_, m) => m.lhs) < The values of the mode_bits are defined in Vim's src/vim.h file and they can be discovered at runtime using |:map-commands| and "maplist()". Example: > vim9script omap xyzzy <Nop> var op_bit = maplist()->filter( (_, m) => m.lhs == 'xyzzy')[0].mode_bits ounmap xyzzy echo printf("Operator-pending mode bit: 0x%x", op_bit) mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) *mapnew()* Like |map()| but instead of replacing items in {expr1} a new List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains unchanged. Items can still be changed by {expr2}, if you don't want that use |deepcopy()| first. mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) *mapset()* mapset({dict}) Restore a mapping from a dictionary, possibly returned by |maparg()| or |maplist()|. A buffer mapping, when dict.buffer is true, is set on the current buffer; it is up to the caller to ensure that the intended buffer is the current buffer. This feature allows copying mappings from one buffer to another. The dict.mode value may restore a single mapping that covers more than one mode, like with mode values of '!', ' ', 'nox', or 'v'. *E1276* In the first form, {mode} and {abbr} should be the same as for the call to |maparg()|. *E460* {mode} is used to define the mode in which the mapping is set, not the "mode" entry in {dict}. Example for saving and restoring a mapping: > let save_map = maparg('K', 'n', 0, 1) nnoremap K somethingelse ... call mapset('n', 0, save_map) < Note that if you are going to replace a map in several modes, e.g. with `:map!`, you need to save/restore the mapping for all of them, when they might differ. In the second form, with {dict} as the only argument, mode and abbr are taken from the dict. Example: > vim9script var save_maps = maplist()->filter( (_, m) => m.lhs == 'K') nnoremap K somethingelse cnoremap K somethingelse2 # ... unmap K for d in save_maps mapset(d) endfor match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *match()* When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed. Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where {pat} matches. A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero. If there is no match -1 is returned. For getting submatches see |matchlist()|. Example: > :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4 :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1 < See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. *strpbrk()* Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: > :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]') < *strcasestr()* Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: > :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle') < If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|. The result, however, is still the index counted from the first character/item. Example: > :echo match("testing", "ing", 2) < result is again "4". > :echo match("testing", "ing", 4) < result is again "4". > :echo match("testing", "t", 2) < result is "3". For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it backwards compatible). For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list the index is counted from the end. If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned. When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match is found in a String the search for the next one starts one character further. Thus this example results in 1: > echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2) < In a |List| the search continues in the next item. Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes, see above. See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted. The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty. Note that a match at the start is preferred, thus when the pattern is using "*" (any number of matches) it tends to find zero matches at the start instead of a number of matches further down in the text. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->match('word') GetList()->match('word') < *matchadd()* *E290* *E798* *E799* *E801* *E957* matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the match using |matchdelete()|. The ID is bound to the window. Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}. The 'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used. The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be concealed. The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the match. A match with a high priority will have its highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority. A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero, hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will always overrule syntax highlighting. The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|, respectively. 3 is reserved for use by the |matchparen| plugin. If the {id} argument is not specified or -1, |matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID, which is at least 1000. The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal| highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members: conceal Special character to show instead of the match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighted matches, see |:syn-cchar|) window Instead of the current window use the window with this number or window ID. The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with the |:match| commands. Returns -1 on error. Example: > :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO") < Deletion of the pattern: > :call matchdelete(m) < A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetGroup()->matchadd('TODO') < *matchaddpos()* matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos} instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()| because it does not require to handle regular expressions and sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed to be used when fast match additions and deletions are required, for example to highlight matching parentheses. {pos} is a list of positions. Each position can be one of these: - A number. This whole line will be highlighted. The first line has number 1. - A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this number will be highlighted. - A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is the line number, the second one is the column number (first column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as |col()| would return). The character at this position will be highlighted. - A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes. Returns -1 on error. Example: > :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green :let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34]) < Deletion of the pattern: > :call matchdelete(m) < Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by |getmatches()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetGroup()->matchaddpos([23, 11]) matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()* Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|, |:2match| or |:3match| command. Return a |List| with two elements: The name of the highlight group used The pattern used. When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|. When there is no match item set returns ['', '']. This is useful to save and restore a |:match|. Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMatch()->matcharg() < *matchbufline()* matchbufline({buf}, {pat}, {lnum}, {end}, [, {dict}]) Returns the |List| of matches in lines from {lnum} to {end} in buffer {buf} where {pat} matches. {lnum} and {end} can either be a line number or the string "$" to refer to the last line in {buf}. The {dict} argument supports following items: submatches include submatch information (|/\(|) For each match, a |Dict| with the following items is returned: byteidx starting byte index of the match lnum line number where there is a match text matched string Note that there can be multiple matches in a single line. This function works only for loaded buffers. First call |bufload()| if needed. When {buf} is not a valid buffer, the buffer is not loaded or {lnum} or {end} is not valid then an error is given and an empty |List| is returned. Examples: > " Assuming line 3 in buffer 5 contains "a" :echo matchbufline(5, '\<\k\+\>', 3, 3) [{'lnum': 3, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'a'}] " Assuming line 4 in buffer 10 contains "tik tok" :echo matchbufline(10, '\<\k\+\>', 1, 4) [{'lnum': 4, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'tik'}, {'lnum': 4, 'byteidx': 4, 'text': 'tok'}] < If {submatch} is present and is v:true, then submatches like "\1", "\2", etc. are also returned. Example: > " Assuming line 2 in buffer 2 contains "acd" :echo matchbufline(2, '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)', 2, 2 \ {'submatches': v:true}) [{'lnum': 2, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'acd', 'submatches': ['a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']}] < The "submatches" List always contains 9 items. If a submatch is not found, then an empty string is returned for that submatch. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->matchbufline('mypat', 1, '$') matchdelete({id} [, {win}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803* Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()| or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful, otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or window ID instead of the current window. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMatch()->matchdelete() matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchend()* Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character after the match. Example: > :echo matchend("testing", "ing") < results in "7". *strspn()* *strcspn()* Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can do it with matchend(): > :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]') :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]') < Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches. The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2) < results in "7". > :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5) < result is "-1". When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->matchend('word') matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzy()* If {list} is a list of strings, then returns a |List| with all the strings in {list} that fuzzy match {str}. The strings in the returned list are sorted based on the matching score. The optional {dict} argument always supports the following items: matchseq When this item is present return only matches that contain the characters in {str} in the given sequence. limit Maximum number of matches in {list} to be returned. Zero means no limit. If {list} is a list of dictionaries, then the optional {dict} argument supports the following additional items: key Key of the item which is fuzzy matched against {str}. The value of this item should be a string. text_cb |Funcref| that will be called for every item in {list} to get the text for fuzzy matching. This should accept a dictionary item as the argument and return the text for that item to use for fuzzy matching. {str} is treated as a literal string and regular expression matching is NOT supported. The maximum supported {str} length is 256. When {str} has multiple words each separated by white space, then the list of strings that have all the words is returned. If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then an empty list is returned. If length of {str} is greater than 256, then returns an empty list. When {limit} is given, matchfuzzy() will find up to this number of matches in {list} and return them in sorted order. Refer to |fuzzy-matching| for more information about fuzzy matching strings. Example: > :echo matchfuzzy(["clay", "crow"], "cay") < results in ["clay"]. > :echo getbufinfo()->map({_, v -> v.name})->matchfuzzy("ndl") < results in a list of buffer names fuzzy matching "ndl". > :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("ndl", {'key' : 'name'}) < results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer names fuzzy matching "ndl". > :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("spl", \ {'text_cb' : {v -> v.name}}) < results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer names fuzzy matching "spl". > :echo v:oldfiles->matchfuzzy("test") < results in a list of file names fuzzy matching "test". > :let l = readfile("buffer.c")->matchfuzzy("str") < results in a list of lines in "buffer.c" fuzzy matching "str". > :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one') < results in ['two one', 'one two']. > :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one', \ {'matchseq': 1}) < results in ['two one']. matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzypos()* Same as |matchfuzzy()|, but returns the list of matched strings, the list of character positions where characters in {str} matches and a list of matching scores. You can use |byteidx()| to convert a character position to a byte position. If {str} matches multiple times in a string, then only the positions for the best match is returned. If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then a list with three empty list items is returned. Example: > :echo matchfuzzypos(['testing'], 'tsg') < results in [['testing'], [[0, 2, 6]], [99]] > :echo matchfuzzypos(['clay', 'lacy'], 'la') < results in [['lacy', 'clay'], [[0, 1], [1, 2]], [153, 133]] > :echo [{'text': 'hello', 'id' : 10}]->matchfuzzypos('ll', {'key' : 'text'}) < results in [[{'id': 10, 'text': 'hello'}], [[2, 3]], [127]] matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchlist()* Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc. in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an empty string is used. Example: > echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)') < Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', ''] When there is no match an empty list is returned. You can pass in a List, but that is not very useful. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->matchlist('word') < *matchstrlist()* matchstrlist({list}, {pat} [, {dict}]) Returns the |List| of matches in {list} where {pat} matches. {list} is a |List| of strings. {pat} is matched against each string in {list}. The {dict} argument supports following items: submatches include submatch information (|/\(|) For each match, a |Dict| with the following items is returned: byteidx starting byte index of the match. idx index in {list} of the match. text matched string submatches a List of submatches. Present only if "submatches" is set to v:true in {dict}. Example: > :echo matchstrlist(['tik tok'], '\<\k\+\>') [{'idx': 0, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'tik'}, {'idx': 0, 'byteidx': 4, 'text': 'tok'}] :echo matchstrlist(['a', 'b'], '\<\k\+\>') [{'idx': 0, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'a'}, {'idx': 1, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'b'}] < If "submatches" is present and is v:true, then submatches like "\1", "\2", etc. are also returned. Example: > :echo matchstrlist(['acd'], '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)', \ #{submatches: v:true}) [{'idx': 0, 'byteidx': 0, 'text': 'acd', 'submatches': ['a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']}] < The "submatches" List always contains 9 items. If a submatch is not found, then an empty string is returned for that submatch. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetListOfStrings()->matchstrlist('mypat') matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstr()* Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: > :echo matchstr("testing", "ing") < results in "ing". When there is no match "" is returned. The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2) < results in "ing". > :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5) < result is "". When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned. The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->matchstr('word') matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstrpos()* Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start position and the end position of the match. Example: > :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing") < results in ["ing", 4, 7]. When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned. The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2) < results in ["ing", 4, 7]. > :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5) < result is ["", -1, -1]. When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the end position of the match are returned. > :echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a') < result is ["x", 1, 2, 3]. The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->matchstrpos('word') < *max()* max({expr}) Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}. Example: > echo max([apples, pears, oranges]) < {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary, it returns the maximum of all values in the Dictionary. If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->max() menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) *menu_info()* Return information about the specified menu {name} in mode {mode}. The menu name should be specified without the shortcut character ('&'). If {name} is "", then the top-level menu names are returned. {mode} can be one of these strings: "n" Normal "v" Visual (including Select) "o" Operator-pending "i" Insert "c" Cmd-line "s" Select "x" Visual "t" Terminal-Job "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending "!" Insert and Cmd-line When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. Returns a |Dictionary| containing the following items: accel menu item accelerator text |menu-text| display display name (name without '&') enabled v:true if this menu item is enabled Refer to |:menu-enable| icon name of the icon file (for toolbar) |toolbar-icon| iconidx index of a built-in icon modes modes for which the menu is defined. In addition to the modes mentioned above, these characters will be used: " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending name menu item name. noremenu v:true if the {rhs} of the menu item is not remappable else v:false. priority menu order priority |menu-priority| rhs right-hand-side of the menu item. The returned string has special characters translated like in the output of the ":menu" command listing. When the {rhs} of a menu item is empty, then "<Nop>" is returned. script v:true if script-local remapping of {rhs} is allowed else v:false. See |:menu-script|. shortcut shortcut key (character after '&' in the menu name) |menu-shortcut| silent v:true if the menu item is created with <silent> argument |:menu-silent| submenus |List| containing the names of all the submenus. Present only if the menu item has submenus. Returns an empty dictionary if the menu item is not found. Examples: > :echo menu_info('Edit.Cut') :echo menu_info('File.Save', 'n') " Display the entire menu hierarchy in a buffer func ShowMenu(name, pfx) let m = menu_info(a:name) call append(line('$'), a:pfx .. m.display) for child in m->get('submenus', []) call ShowMenu(a:name .. '.' .. escape(child, '.'), \ a:pfx .. ' ') endfor endfunc new for topmenu in menu_info('').submenus call ShowMenu(topmenu, '') endfor < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMenuName()->menu_info('v') < *min()* min({expr}) Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}. Example: > echo min([apples, pears, oranges]) < {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary, it returns the minimum of all values in the Dictionary. If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->min() < *mkdir()* *E739* mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]]) Create directory {name}. When {flags} is present it must be a string. An empty string has no effect. If {flags} contains "p" then intermediate directories are created as necessary. If {flags} contains "D" then {name} is deleted at the end of the current function, as with: > defer delete({name}, 'd') < If {flags} contains "R" then {name} is deleted recursively at the end of the current function, as with: > defer delete({name}, 'rf') < Note that when {name} has more than one part and "p" is used some directories may already exist. Only the first one that is created and what it contains is scheduled to be deleted. E.g. when using: > call mkdir('subdir/tmp/autoload', 'pR') < and "subdir" already exists then "subdir/tmp" will be scheduled for deletion, like with: > defer delete('subdir/tmp', 'rf') < Note that if scheduling the defer fails the directory is not deleted. This should only happen when out of memory. If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of the new directory. The default is 0o755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for the user, readable for others). Use 0o700 to make it unreadable for others. This is only used for the last part of {name}. Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created with 0o755. Example: > :call mkdir($HOME .. "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0o700) < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. There is no error if the directory already exists and the "p" flag is passed (since patch 8.0.1708). However, without the "p" option the call will fail. The function result is a Number, which is TRUE if the call was successful or FALSE if the directory creation failed or partly failed. Not available on all systems. To check use: > :if exists("*mkdir") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->mkdir() < *mode()* mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode. If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. Also see |state()|. n Normal no Operator-pending nov Operator-pending (forced characterwise |o_v|) noV Operator-pending (forced linewise |o_V|) noCTRL-V Operator-pending (forced blockwise |o_CTRL-V|); CTRL-V is one character niI Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Insert-mode| niR Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Replace-mode| niV Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Virtual-Replace-mode| nt Terminal-Normal (insert goes to Terminal-Job mode) v Visual by character vs Visual by character using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode V Visual by line Vs Visual by line using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode CTRL-V Visual blockwise CTRL-Vs Visual blockwise using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode s Select by character S Select by line CTRL-S Select blockwise i Insert ic Insert mode completion |compl-generic| ix Insert mode |i_CTRL-X| completion R Replace |R| Rc Replace mode completion |compl-generic| Rx Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion Rv Virtual Replace |gR| Rvc Virtual Replace mode completion |compl-generic| Rvx Virtual Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion c Command-line editing ct Command-line editing via Terminal-Job mode cr Command-line editing overstrike mode |c_<Insert>| cv Vim Ex mode |gQ| cvr Vim Ex mode while in overstrike mode |c_<Insert>| ce Normal Ex mode |Q| r Hit-enter prompt rm The -- more -- prompt r? A |:confirm| query of some sort ! Shell or external command is executing t Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns "c" or "n". Note that in the future more modes and more specific modes may be added. It's better not to compare the whole string but only the leading character(s). Also see |visualmode()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > DoFull()->mode() mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()* Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Numbers and strings are returned as they are. Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are returned as Vim |Lists|. Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys converted to strings. All other types are converted to string with display function. Examples: > :mz (define l (list 1 2 3)) :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l) :echo mzeval("l") :echo mzeval("h") < Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->mzeval() < {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature} nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()* Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum} that is not blank. Example: > if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java" < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or below it, zero is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. See also |prevnonblank()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->nextnonblank() nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) *nr2char()* Return a string with a single character, which has the number value {expr}. Examples: > nr2char(64) returns "@" nr2char(32) returns " " < When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": > nr2char(300) returns I with bow character < When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters. Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the string, thus results in an empty string. To turn a list of character numbers into a string: > let list = [65, 66, 67] let str = join(map(list, {_, val -> nr2char(val)}), '') < Result: "ABC" Can also be used as a |method|: > GetNumber()->nr2char() or({expr}, {expr}) *or()* Bitwise OR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Also see `and()` and `xor()`. Example: > :let bits = or(bits, 0x80) < Can also be used as a |method|: > :let bits = bits->or(0x80) < Rationale: The reason this is a function and not using the "|" character like many languages, is that Vi has always used "|" to separate commands. In many places it would not be clear if "|" is an operator or a command separator. pathshorten({path} [, {len}]) *pathshorten()* Shorten directory names in the path {path} and return the result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other components in the path are reduced to {len} letters in length. If {len} is omitted or smaller than 1 then 1 is used (single letters). Leading '~' and '.' characters are kept. Examples: > :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim') < ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~ > :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim', 2) < ~/.vi/au/myfile.vim ~ It doesn't matter if the path exists or not. Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetDirectories()->pathshorten() perleval({expr}) *perleval()* Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation. Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a reference to it. Example: > :echo perleval('[1 .. 4]') < [1, 2, 3, 4] Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->perleval() < {only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature} popup_ functions are documented here: |popup-functions| pow({x}, {y}) *pow()* Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|. {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {x} or {y} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo pow(3, 3) < 27.0 > :echo pow(2, 16) < 65536.0 > :echo pow(32, 0.20) < 2.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->pow(3) prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()* Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum} that is not blank. Example: > let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)) < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or above it, zero is returned. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Also see |nextnonblank()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetLnum()->prevnonblank() printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()* Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: > printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg) < May result in: " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~ When used as a |method| the base is passed as the second argument: > Compute()->printf("result: %d") < You can use `call()` to pass the items as a list. Often used items are: %s string %6S string right-aligned in 6 display cells %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes %c single byte %d decimal number %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters %x hex number %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters %X hex number using upper case letters %o octal number %08b binary number padded with zeros to at least 8 chars %f floating point number as 12.23, inf, -inf or nan %F floating point number as 12.23, INF, -INF or NAN %e floating point number as 1.23e3, inf, -inf or nan %E floating point number as 1.23E3, INF, -INF or NAN %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value %G floating point number, as %F or %E depending on value %% the % character itself Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to the result. The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following arguments appear in sequence: % [pos-argument] [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type pos-argument At most one positional argument specifier. These take the form {n$}, where n is >= 1. flags Zero or more of the following flags: # The value should be converted to an "alternate form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option has no effect. For o conversions, the precision of the number is increased to force the first character of the output string to a zero (except if a zero value is printed with an explicit precision of zero). For b and B conversions, a non-zero result has the string "0b" (or "0B" for B conversions) prepended to it. For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions) prepended to it. 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted value is padded on the left with zeros rather than blanks. If a precision is given with a numeric conversion (d, b, B, o, x, and X), the 0 flag is ignored. - A negative field width flag; the converted value is to be left adjusted on the field boundary. The converted value is padded on the right with blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given. ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive number produced by a signed conversion (d). + A sign must always be placed before a number produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides a space if both are used. field-width An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has been given) to fill out the field width. For the S conversion the count is in cells. .precision An optional precision, in the form of a period '.' followed by an optional digit string. If the digit string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero. This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for d, o, x, and X conversions, the maximum number of bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions, or the maximum number of cells to be printed from a string for S conversions. For floating point it is the number of digits after the decimal point. type A character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied, see below. A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is treated as though it were missing. Example: > :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line) < This limits the length of the text used from "line" to "width" bytes. If the argument to be formatted is specified using a positional argument specifier, and a '*' is used to indicate that a number argument is to be used to specify the width or precision, the argument(s) to be used must also be specified using a {n$} positional argument specifier. See |printf-$|. The conversion specifiers and their meanings are: *printf-d* *printf-b* *printf-B* *printf-o* *printf-x* *printf-X* dbBoxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal (d), unsigned binary (b and B), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x and X) notation. The letters "abcdef" are used for x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X conversions. The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of digits that must appear; if the converted value requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with zeros. In no case does a non-existent or small field width cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the conversion result. The 'h' modifier indicates the argument is 16 bits. The 'l' modifier indicates the argument is a long integer. The size will be 32 bits or 64 bits depending on your platform. The "ll" modifier indicates the argument is 64 bits. The b and B conversion specifiers never take a width modifier and always assume their argument is a 64 bit integer. Generally, these modifiers are not useful. They are ignored when type is known from the argument. i alias for d D alias for ld U alias for lu O alias for lo *printf-c* c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the resulting character is written. *printf-s* s The text of the String argument is used. If a precision is specified, no more bytes than the number specified are used. If the argument is not a String type, it is automatically converted to text with the same format as ":echo". *printf-S* S The text of the String argument is used. If a precision is specified, no more display cells than the number specified are used. *printf-f* *E807* f F The Float argument is converted into a string of the form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of digits after the decimal point. When the precision is zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision is not specified 6 is used. A really big number (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf" or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F). "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F). Example: > echo printf("%.2f", 12.115) < 12.12 Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries. Use |round()| when in doubt. *printf-e* *printf-E* e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The precision specifies the number of digits after the decimal point, like with 'f'. *printf-g* *printf-G* g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0 (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E' for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0 results in 1.0e7. *printf-%* % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The complete conversion specification is "%%". When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also accepted and automatically converted. When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument is also accepted and automatically converted. Any other argument type results in an error message. *E766* *E767* The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used. *printf-$* In certain languages, error and informative messages are more readable when the order of words is different from the corresponding message in English. To accommodate translations having a different word order, positional arguments may be used to indicate this. For instance: > #, c-format msgid "%s returning %s" msgstr "waarde %2$s komt terug van %1$s" < In this example, the sentence has its 2 string arguments reversed in the output. > echo printf( "In The Netherlands, vim's creator's name is: %1$s %2$s", "Bram", "Moolenaar") < In The Netherlands, vim's creator's name is: Bram Moolenaar > echo printf( "In Belgium, vim's creator's name is: %2$s %1$s", "Bram", "Moolenaar") < In Belgium, vim's creator's name is: Moolenaar Bram Width (and precision) can be specified using the '*' specifier. In this case, you must specify the field width position in the argument list. > echo printf("%1$*2$.*3$d", 1, 2, 3) < 001 > echo printf("%2$*3$.*1$d", 1, 2, 3) < 2 > echo printf("%3$*1$.*2$d", 1, 2, 3) < 03 > echo printf("%1$*2$.*3$g", 1.4142, 2, 3) < 1.414 You can mix specifying the width and/or precision directly and via positional arguments: > echo printf("%1$4.*2$f", 1.4142135, 6) < 1.414214 > echo printf("%1$*2$.4f", 1.4142135, 6) < 1.4142 > echo printf("%1$*2$.*3$f", 1.4142135, 6, 2) < 1.41 *E1500* You cannot mix positional and non-positional arguments: > echo printf("%s%1$s", "One", "Two") < E1500: Cannot mix positional and non-positional arguments: %s%1$s *E1501* You cannot skip a positional argument in a format string: > echo printf("%3$s%1$s", "One", "Two", "Three") < E1501: format argument 2 unused in $-style format: %3$s%1$s *E1502* You can re-use a [field-width] (or [precision]) argument: > echo printf("%1$d at width %2$d is: %01$*2$d", 1, 2) < 1 at width 2 is: 01 However, you can't use it as a different type: > echo printf("%1$d at width %2$ld is: %01$*2$d", 1, 2) < E1502: Positional argument 2 used as field width reused as different type: long int/int *E1503* When a positional argument is used, but not the correct number or arguments is given, an error is raised: > echo printf("%1$d at width %2$d is: %01$*2$.*3$d", 1, 2) < E1503: Positional argument 3 out of bounds: %1$d at width %2$d is: %01$*2$.*3$d Only the first error is reported: > echo printf("%01$*2$.*3$d %4$d", 1, 2) < E1503: Positional argument 3 out of bounds: %01$*2$.*3$d %4$d *E1504* A positional argument can be used more than once: > echo printf("%1$s %2$s %1$s", "One", "Two") < One Two One However, you can't use a different type the second time: > echo printf("%1$s %2$s %1$d", "One", "Two") < E1504: Positional argument 1 type used inconsistently: int/string *E1505* Various other errors that lead to a format string being wrongly formatted lead to: > echo printf("%1$d at width %2$d is: %01$*2$.3$d", 1, 2) < E1505: Invalid format specifier: %1$d at width %2$d is: %01$*2$.3$d *E1507* This internal error indicates that the logic to parse a positional format argument ran into a problem that couldn't be otherwise reported. Please file a bug against Vim if you run into this, copying the exact format string and parameters that were used. prompt_getprompt({buf}) *prompt_getprompt()* Returns the effective prompt text for buffer {buf}. {buf} can be a buffer name or number. See |prompt-buffer|. If the buffer doesn't exist or isn't a prompt buffer, an empty string is returned. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->prompt_getprompt() < {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setcallback()* Set prompt callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr} is an empty string the callback is removed. This has only effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt". The callback is invoked when pressing Enter. The current buffer will always be the prompt buffer. A new line for a prompt is added before invoking the callback, thus the prompt for which the callback was invoked will be in the last but one line. If the callback wants to add text to the buffer, it must insert it above the last line, since that is where the current prompt is. This can also be done asynchronously. The callback is invoked with one argument, which is the text that was entered at the prompt. This can be an empty string if the user only typed Enter. Example: > func s:TextEntered(text) if a:text == 'exit' || a:text == 'quit' stopinsert " Reset 'modified' to allow the buffer to be closed. " We assume there is nothing useful to be saved. set nomodified close else " Do something useful with "a:text". In this example " we just repeat it. call append(line('$') - 1, 'Entered: "' .. a:text .. '"') endif endfunc call prompt_setcallback(bufnr(), function('s:TextEntered')) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->prompt_setcallback(callback) < {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setinterrupt()* Set a callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr} is an empty string the callback is removed. This has only effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt". This callback will be invoked when pressing CTRL-C in Insert mode. Without setting a callback Vim will exit Insert mode, as in any buffer. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->prompt_setinterrupt(callback) < {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) *prompt_setprompt()* Set prompt for buffer {buf} to {text}. You most likely want {text} to end in a space. The result is only visible if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt". Example: > call prompt_setprompt(bufnr(), 'command: ') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBuffer()->prompt_setprompt('command: ') < {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} prop_ functions are documented here: |text-prop-functions| pum_getpos() *pum_getpos()* If the popup menu (see |ins-completion-menu|) is not visible, returns an empty |Dictionary|, otherwise, returns a |Dictionary| with the following keys: height nr of items visible width screen cells row top screen row (0 first row) col leftmost screen column (0 first col) size total nr of items scrollbar |TRUE| if scrollbar is visible The values are the same as in |v:event| during |CompleteChanged|. pumvisible() *pumvisible()* Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|. This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the popup menu. py3eval({expr}) *py3eval()* Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are copied though, Unicode strings are additionally converted to 'encoding'). Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys converted to strings. Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->py3eval() < {only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature} *E858* *E859* pyeval({expr}) *pyeval()* Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are copied though). Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type, non-string keys result in error. Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->pyeval() < {only available when compiled with the |+python| feature} pyxeval({expr}) *pyxeval()* Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Uses Python 2 or 3, see |python_x| and 'pyxversion'. See also: |pyeval()|, |py3eval()| Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->pyxeval() < {only available when compiled with the |+python| or the |+python3| feature} rand([{expr}]) *rand()* *random* Return a pseudo-random Number generated with an xoshiro128** algorithm using seed {expr}. The returned number is 32 bits, also on 64 bits systems, for consistency. {expr} can be initialized by |srand()| and will be updated by rand(). If {expr} is omitted, an internal seed value is used and updated. Returns -1 if {expr} is invalid. Examples: > :echo rand() :let seed = srand() :echo rand(seed) :echo rand(seed) % 16 " random number 0 - 15 < *E726* *E727* range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()* Returns a |List| with Numbers: - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1] - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}] - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ..., {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not producing a value past {max}). When the maximum is one before the start the result is an empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the start this is an error. Examples: > range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3] range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4] range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8] range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2] range(0) " [] range(2, 0) " error! < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetExpr()->range() < readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]]) *readblob()* Read file {fname} in binary mode and return a |Blob|. If {offset} is specified, read the file from the specified offset. If it is a negative value, it is used as an offset from the end of the file. E.g., to read the last 12 bytes: > readblob('file.bin', -12) < If {size} is specified, only the specified size will be read. E.g. to read the first 100 bytes of a file: > readblob('file.bin', 0, 100) < If {size} is -1 or omitted, the whole data starting from {offset} will be read. This can be also used to read the data from a character device on Unix when {size} is explicitly set. Only if the device supports seeking {offset} can be used. Otherwise it should be zero. E.g. to read 10 bytes from a serial console: > readblob('/dev/ttyS0', 0, 10) < When the file can't be opened an error message is given and the result is an empty |Blob|. When the offset is beyond the end of the file the result is an empty blob. When trying to read more bytes than are available the result is truncated. Also see |readfile()| and |writefile()|. readdir({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdir()* Return a list with file and directory names in {directory}. You can also use |glob()| if you don't need to do complicated things, such as limiting the number of matches. The list will be sorted (case sensitive), see the {dict} argument below for changing the sort order. When {expr} is omitted all entries are included. When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do: If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will be handled. If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be added to the list. If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added to the list. The entries "." and ".." are always excluded. Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to the entry name. When {expr} is a function the name is passed as the argument. For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": > readdir(dirname, {n -> n =~ '.txt$'}) < To skip hidden and backup files: > readdir(dirname, {n -> n !~ '^\.\|\~$'}) < *E857* The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom values. Currently this is used to specify if and how sorting should be performed. The dict can have the following members: sort How to sort the result returned from the system. Valid values are: "none" do not sort (fastest method) "case" sort case sensitive (byte value of each character, technically, using strcmp()) (default) "icase" sort case insensitive (technically using strcasecmp()) "collate" sort using the collation order of the "POSIX" or "C" |locale| (technically using strcoll()) Other values are silently ignored. For example, to get a list of all files in the current directory without sorting the individual entries: > readdir('.', '1', #{sort: 'none'}) < If you want to get a directory tree: > function! s:tree(dir) return {a:dir : map(readdir(a:dir), \ {_, x -> isdirectory(x) ? \ {x : s:tree(a:dir .. '/' .. x)} : x})} endfunction echo s:tree(".") < Returns an empty List on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetDirName()->readdir() < readdirex({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdirex()* Extended version of |readdir()|. Return a list of Dictionaries with file and directory information in {directory}. This is useful if you want to get the attributes of file and directory at the same time as getting a list of a directory. This is much faster than calling |readdir()| then calling |getfperm()|, |getfsize()|, |getftime()| and |getftype()| for each file and directory especially on MS-Windows. The list will by default be sorted by name (case sensitive), the sorting can be changed by using the optional {dict} argument, see |readdir()|. The Dictionary for file and directory information has the following items: group Group name of the entry. (Only on Unix) name Name of the entry. perm Permissions of the entry. See |getfperm()|. size Size of the entry. See |getfsize()|. time Timestamp of the entry. See |getftime()|. type Type of the entry. On Unix, almost same as |getftype()| except: Symlink to a dir "linkd" Other symlink "link" On MS-Windows: Normal file "file" Directory "dir" Junction "junction" Symlink to a dir "linkd" Other symlink "link" Other reparse point "reparse" user User name of the entry's owner. (Only on Unix) On Unix, if the entry is a symlink, the Dictionary includes the information of the target (except the "type" item). On MS-Windows, it includes the information of the symlink itself because of performance reasons. When {expr} is omitted all entries are included. When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do: If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will be handled. If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be added to the list. If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added to the list. The entries "." and ".." are always excluded. Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to a |Dictionary| of the entry. When {expr} is a function the entry is passed as the argument. For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": > readdirex(dirname, {e -> e.name =~ '.txt$'}) < For example, to get a list of all files in the current directory without sorting the individual entries: > readdirex(dirname, '1', #{sort: 'none'}) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetDirName()->readdirex() < *readfile()* readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]]) Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file as an item. Lines are broken at NL characters. Macintosh files separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a NL appears somewhere). All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character. When {type} contains "b" binary mode is used: - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is added. - No CR characters are removed. Otherwise: - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed. - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter. - When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is removed from the text. When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten lines of a file: > :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10) : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif :endfor < When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file are returned, or as many as there are. When {max} is zero the result is an empty list. Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory. Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a file into a buffer if you need to. Deprecated (use |readblob()| instead): When {type} contains "B" a |Blob| is returned with the binary data of the file unmodified. When the file can't be opened an error message is given and the result is an empty list. Also see |writefile()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFileName()->readfile() reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}]) *reduce()* *E998* {func} is called for every item in {object}, which can be a |String|, |List| or a |Blob|. {func} is called with two arguments: the result so far and current item. After processing all items the result is returned. *E1132* {initial} is the initial result. When omitted, the first item in {object} is used and {func} is first called for the second item. If {initial} is not given and {object} is empty no result can be computed, an E998 error is given. Examples: > echo reduce([1, 3, 5], { acc, val -> acc + val }) echo reduce(['x', 'y'], { acc, val -> acc .. val }, 'a') echo reduce(0z1122, { acc, val -> 2 * acc + val }) echo reduce('xyz', { acc, val -> acc .. ',' .. val }) < Can also be used as a |method|: > echo mylist->reduce({ acc, val -> acc + val }, 0) reg_executing() *reg_executing()* Returns the single letter name of the register being executed. Returns an empty string when no register is being executed. See |@|. reg_recording() *reg_recording()* Returns the single letter name of the register being recorded. Returns an empty string when not recording. See |q|. reltime() reltime({start}) reltime({start}, {end}) *reltime()* Return an item that represents a time value. The item is a list with items that depend on the system. In Vim 9 script the type list<any> can be used. The item can be passed to |reltimestr()| to convert it to a string or |reltimefloat()| to convert to a Float. For example, to see the time spent in function Work(): > var startTime = reltime() Work() echo startTime->reltime()->reltimestr() < Without an argument reltime() returns the current time (the representation is system-dependent, it cannot be used as the wall-clock time, see |localtime()| for that). With one argument it returns the time passed since the time specified in the argument. With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start} and {end}. The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by reltime(). If there is an error an empty List is returned in legacy script, in Vim9 script an error is given. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetStart()->reltime() < {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} reltimefloat({time}) *reltimefloat()* Return a Float that represents the time value of {time}. Example: > let start = reltime() call MyFunction() let seconds = reltimefloat(reltime(start)) < See the note of reltimestr() about overhead. Also see |profiling|. If there is an error 0.0 is returned in legacy script, in Vim9 script an error is given. Can also be used as a |method|: > reltime(start)->reltimefloat() < {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()* Return a String that represents the time value of {time}. This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of microseconds. Example: > let start = reltime() call MyFunction() echo reltimestr(reltime(start)) < Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time. The accuracy depends on the system. Use reltimefloat() for the greatest accuracy which is nanoseconds on some systems. Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You can use split() to remove it. > echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0] < Also see |profiling|. If there is an error an empty string is returned in legacy script, in Vim9 script an error is given. Can also be used as a |method|: > reltime(start)->reltimestr() < {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} *remote_expr()* *E449* remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]]) Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a string, also see |{server}|. The string is sent as an expression and the result is returned after evaluation. The result must be a String or a |List|. A |List| is turned into a String by joining the items with a line break in between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n"). If {idvar} is present and not empty, it is taken as the name of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with |remote_read()| is stored there. If {timeout} is given the read times out after this many seconds. Otherwise a timeout of 600 seconds is used. See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued and the result will be the empty string. Variables will be evaluated in the global namespace, independent of a function currently being active. Except when in debug mode, then local function variables and arguments can be evaluated. Examples: > :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2") :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax") < Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerName()->remote_expr(expr) remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()* Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground. The {server} argument is a string, also see |{server}|. This works like: > remote_expr({server}, "foreground()") < Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server to bring itself to the foreground. Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized, like foreground() does. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerName()->remote_foreground() < {only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the Win32 console version} remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()* Returns a positive number if there are available strings from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the name of a variable. Returns zero if none are available. Returns -1 if something is wrong. See also |clientserver|. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Examples: > :let repl = "" :echo "PEEK: " .. remote_peek(id, "repl") .. ": " .. repl < Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerId()->remote_peek() remote_read({serverid}, [{timeout}]) *remote_read()* Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume it. Unless a {timeout} in seconds is given, it blocks until a reply is available. Returns an empty string, if a reply is not available or on error. See also |clientserver|. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Example: > :echo remote_read(id) < Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerId()->remote_read() < *remote_send()* *E241* remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a string, also see |{server}|. The string is sent as input keys and the function returns immediately. At the Vim server the keys are not mapped |:map|. If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored there. See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess up the display. Examples: > :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply " .. file, "serverid") .. \ remote_read(serverid) :autocmd NONE RemoteReply * \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>")) :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo " .. \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>') < Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerName()->remote_send(keys) < *remote_startserver()* *E941* *E942* remote_startserver({name}) Become the server {name}. {name} must be a non-empty string. This fails if already running as a server, when |v:servername| is not empty. Can also be used as a |method|: > ServerName()->remote_startserver() < {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} remove({list}, {idx}) remove({list}, {idx}, {end}) *remove()* Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and return the item. With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and return a |List| with these items. When {idx} points to the same item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end} points to an item before {idx} this is an error. See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}. Returns zero on error. Example: > :echo "last item: " .. remove(mylist, -1) :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) < Use |delete()| to remove a file. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->remove(idx) remove({blob}, {idx}) remove({blob}, {idx}, {end}) Without {end}: Remove the byte at {idx} from |Blob| {blob} and return the byte. With {end}: Remove bytes from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and return a |Blob| with these bytes. When {idx} points to the same byte as {end} a |Blob| with one byte is returned. When {end} points to a byte before {idx} this is an error. Returns zero on error. Example: > :echo "last byte: " .. remove(myblob, -1) :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) remove({dict}, {key}) Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key} and return it. Example: > :echo "removed " .. remove(dict, "one") < If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error. Returns zero on error. rename({from}, {to}) *rename()* Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This should also work to move files across file systems. The result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed. NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetOldName()->rename(newname) repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()* Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated result. Example: > :let separator = repeat('-', 80) < When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty. When {expr} is a |List| or a |Blob| the result is {expr} concatenated {count} times. Example: > :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3) < Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b']. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->repeat(count) resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655* On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file), returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form. When {filename} is a symbolic link or junction point, return the full path to the target. If the target of junction is removed, return {filename}. On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path components of {filename} and return the simplified result. To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is stopped after 100 iterations. On other systems, return the simplified {filename}. The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|. resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the current directory (provided the result is still a relative path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->resolve() reverse({object}) *reverse()* Reverse the order of items in {object}. {object} can be a |List|, a |Blob| or a |String|. For a List and a Blob the items are reversed in-place and {object} is returned. For a String a new String is returned. Returns zero if {object} is not a List, Blob or a String. If you want a List or Blob to remain unmodified make a copy first: > :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist)) < Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->reverse() round({expr}) *round()* Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral values, then use the larger one (away from zero). {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > echo round(0.456) < 0.0 > echo round(4.5) < 5.0 > echo round(-4.5) < -5.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->round() rubyeval({expr}) *rubyeval()* Evaluate Ruby expression {expr} and return its result converted to Vim data structures. Numbers, floats and strings are returned as they are (strings are copied though). Arrays are represented as Vim |List| type. Hashes are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type. Other objects are represented as strings resulted from their "Object#to_s" method. Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible to {expr}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRubyExpr()->rubyeval() < {only available when compiled with the |+ruby| feature} screenattr({row}, {col}) *screenattr()* Like |screenchar()|, but return the attribute. This is a rather arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the attribute at other positions. Returns -1 when row or col is out of range. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRow()->screenattr(col) screenchar({row}, {col}) *screenchar()* The result is a Number, which is the character at position [row, col] on the screen. This works for every possible screen position, also status lines, window separators and the command line. The top left position is row one, column one The character excludes composing characters. For double-byte encodings it may only be the first byte. This is mainly to be used for testing. Returns -1 when row or col is out of range. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRow()->screenchar(col) screenchars({row}, {col}) *screenchars()* The result is a |List| of Numbers. The first number is the same as what |screenchar()| returns. Further numbers are composing characters on top of the base character. This is mainly to be used for testing. Returns an empty List when row or col is out of range. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRow()->screenchars(col) screencol() *screencol()* The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1. This function is mainly used for testing. Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of the following mappings: > nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom " .. screencol() .. "\n" nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR> nnoremap GG <Cmd>echom screencol()<CR> < screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *screenpos()* The result is a Dict with the screen position of the text character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and column {col}. {col} is a one-based byte index. The Dict has these members: row screen row col first screen column endcol last screen column curscol cursor screen column If the specified position is not visible, all values are zero. The "endcol" value differs from "col" when the character occupies more than one screen cell. E.g. for a Tab "col" can be 1 and "endcol" can be 8. The "curscol" value is where the cursor would be placed. For a Tab it would be the same as "endcol", while for a double width character it would be the same as "col". The |conceal| feature is ignored here, the column numbers are as if 'conceallevel' is zero. You can set the cursor to the right position and use |screencol()| to get the value with |conceal| taken into account. If the position is in a closed fold the screen position of the first character is returned, {col} is not used. Returns an empty Dict if {winid} is invalid. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->screenpos(lnum, col) screenrow() *screenrow()* The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the cursor. The top line has number one. This function is mainly used for testing. Alternatively you can use |winline()|. Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|. screenstring({row}, {col}) *screenstring()* The result is a String that contains the base character and any composing characters at position [row, col] on the screen. This is like |screenchars()| but returning a String with the characters. This is mainly to be used for testing. Returns an empty String when row or col is out of range. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetRow()->screenstring(col) < *search()* search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it). When a match has been found its line number is returned. If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is given. {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags: 'b' search Backward instead of forward 'c' accept a match at the Cursor position 'e' move to the End of the match 'n' do Not move the cursor 'p' return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below) 's' Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor 'w' Wrap around the end of the file 'W' don't Wrap around the end of the file 'z' start searching at the cursor column instead of zero If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies. If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n' flag. 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used. When the 'z' flag is not given, forward searching always starts in column zero and then matches before the cursor are skipped. When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next search starts after the match. Without the 'c' flag the next search starts one column after the start of the match. This matters for overlapping matches. See |cpo-c|. You can also insert "\ze" to change where the match ends, see |/\ze|. When searching backwards and the 'z' flag is given then the search starts in column zero, thus no match in the current line will be found (unless wrapping around the end of the file). When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the search to a range of lines. Examples: > let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0")) let end = search('END', '', line("w$")) < When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies that the search does not wrap around the end of the file. A zero value is equal to not giving the argument. *E1285* *E1286* *E1287* *E1288* *E1289* When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when more than this many milliseconds have passed. Thus when {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second. The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not giving the argument. {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} If the {skip} expression is given it is evaluated with the cursor positioned on the start of a match. If it evaluates to non-zero this match is skipped. This can be used, for example, to skip a match in a comment or a string. {skip} can be a string, which is evaluated as an expression, a function reference or a lambda. When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted and -1 returned. *search()-sub-match* With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the whole pattern did match. To get the column number too use |searchpos()|. The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n' flag is used. Example (goes over all files in the argument list): > :let n = 1 :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist : exe "argument " .. n : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the : " first search to find match at start of file : normal G$ : let flags = "w" : while search("foo", flags) > 0 : s/foo/bar/g : let flags = "W" : endwhile : update " write the file if modified : let n = n + 1 :endwhile < Example for using some flags: > :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe') < This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif" under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0 if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the line: if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~ the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if". The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPattern()->search() searchcount([{options}]) *searchcount()* Get or update the last search count, like what is displayed without the "S" flag in 'shortmess'. This works even if 'shortmess' does contain the "S" flag. This returns a |Dictionary|. The dictionary is empty if the previous pattern was not set and "pattern" was not specified. key type meaning ~ current |Number| current position of match; 0 if the cursor position is before the first match exact_match |Boolean| 1 if "current" is matched on "pos", otherwise 0 total |Number| total count of matches found incomplete |Number| 0: search was fully completed 1: recomputing was timed out 2: max count exceeded For {options} see further down. To get the last search count when |n| or |N| was pressed, call this function with `recompute: 0` . This sometimes returns wrong information because |n| and |N|'s maximum count is 99. If it exceeded 99 the result must be max count + 1 (100). If you want to get correct information, specify `recompute: 1`: > " result == maxcount + 1 (100) when many matches let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0}) " Below returns correct result (recompute defaults " to 1) let result = searchcount() < The function is useful to add the count to 'statusline': > function! LastSearchCount() abort let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0}) if empty(result) return '' endif if result.incomplete ==# 1 " timed out return printf(' /%s [?/??]', @/) elseif result.incomplete ==# 2 " max count exceeded if result.total > result.maxcount && \ result.current > result.maxcount return printf(' /%s [>%d/>%d]', @/, \ result.current, result.total) elseif result.total > result.maxcount return printf(' /%s [%d/>%d]', @/, \ result.current, result.total) endif endif return printf(' /%s [%d/%d]', @/, \ result.current, result.total) endfunction let &statusline ..= '%{LastSearchCount()}' " Or if you want to show the count only when " 'hlsearch' was on " let &statusline ..= " \ '%{v:hlsearch ? LastSearchCount() : ""}' < You can also update the search count, which can be useful in a |CursorMoved| or |CursorMovedI| autocommand: > autocmd CursorMoved,CursorMovedI * \ let s:searchcount_timer = timer_start( \ 200, function('s:update_searchcount')) function! s:update_searchcount(timer) abort if a:timer ==# s:searchcount_timer call searchcount(#{ \ recompute: 1, maxcount: 0, timeout: 100}) redrawstatus endif endfunction < This can also be used to count matched texts with specified pattern in the current buffer using "pattern": > " Count '\<foo\>' in this buffer " (Note that it also updates search count) let result = searchcount(#{pattern: '\<foo\>'}) " To restore old search count by old pattern, " search again call searchcount() < {options} must be a |Dictionary|. It can contain: key type meaning ~ recompute |Boolean| if |TRUE|, recompute the count like |n| or |N| was executed. otherwise returns the last computed result (when |n| or |N| was used when "S" is not in 'shortmess', or this function was called). (default: |TRUE|) pattern |String| recompute if this was given and different with |@/|. this works as same as the below command is executed before calling this function > let @/ = pattern < (default: |@/|) timeout |Number| 0 or negative number is no timeout. timeout milliseconds for recomputing the result (default: 0) maxcount |Number| 0 or negative number is no limit. max count of matched text while recomputing the result. if search exceeded total count, "total" value becomes `maxcount + 1` (default: 99) pos |List| `[lnum, col, off]` value when recomputing the result. this changes "current" result value. see |cursor()|, |getpos()| (default: cursor's position) Can also be used as a |method|: > GetSearchOpts()->searchcount() < searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()* Search for the declaration of {name}. With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find first match in the function. With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids finding variable declarations only valid in another scope. Moves the cursor to the found match. Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. Example: > if searchdecl('myvar') == 0 echo getline('.') endif < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->searchdecl() < *searchpair()* searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other if/endif pairs in between are ignored. The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward. If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is given. {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A typical use is: > searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>') < By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped. {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with |search()|. Additionally: 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag. 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used. Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to avoid wrapping around the end of the file. When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment or a string. When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted and -1 returned. {skip} can be a string, a lambda, a funcref or a partial. Anything else makes the function fail. In a `:def` function when the {skip} argument is a string constant it is compiled into instructions. For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|. The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the patterns are used like it's on. The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: > if 1 if 2 endif 2 endif 1 < When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to "endif 2". When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character, it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds the matching start. Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: > :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W', \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""') < The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command. Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a match. Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": > :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW') < This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax highlighting recognized as strings: > :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"') < *searchpairpos()* searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and column position of the match. The first element of the |List| is the line number and the second element is the byte index of the column position of the match. If no match is found, returns [0, 0]. > :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n') < See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example. *searchpos()* searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and column position of the match. The first element of the |List| is the line number and the second element is the byte index of the column position of the match. If no match is found, returns [0, 0]. Example: > :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n') < When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: > :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np') < In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPattern()->searchpos() server2client({clientid}, {string}) *server2client()* Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid} that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>"). {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. Note: This id has to be stored before the next command can be received. I.e. before returning from the received command and before calling any commands that waits for input. See also |clientserver|. Example: > :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetClientId()->server2client(string) < serverlist() *serverlist()* Return a list of available server names, one per line. When there are no servers or the information is not available an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|. {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} Example: > :echo serverlist() < setbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *setbufline()* Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {buf}. This works like |setline()| for the specified buffer. This function works only for loaded buffers. First call |bufload()| if needed. To insert lines use |appendbufline()|. Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared. {text} can be a string to set one line, or a List of strings to set multiple lines. If the List extends below the last line then those lines are added. If the List is empty then nothing is changed and zero is returned. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. {lnum} is used like with |setline()|. Use "$" to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}. When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be added below the last line. When {buf} is not a valid buffer, the buffer is not loaded or {lnum} is not valid then 1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an error is given. On success 0 is returned. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetText()->setbufline(buf, lnum) setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()* Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {buf} to {val}. This also works for a global or local window option, but it doesn't work for a global or local window variable. For a local window option the global value is unchanged. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. The {varname} argument is a string. Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used. Examples: > :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1) :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar") < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetValue()->setbufvar(buf, varname) setcellwidths({list}) *setcellwidths()* Specify overrides for cell widths of character ranges. This tells Vim how wide characters are when displayed in the terminal, counted in screen cells. The values override 'ambiwidth'. Example: > call setcellwidths([ \ [0x111, 0x111, 1], \ [0x2194, 0x2199, 2], \ ]) < The {list} argument is a List of Lists with each three numbers: [{low}, {high}, {width}]. *E1109* *E1110* {low} and {high} can be the same, in which case this refers to one character. Otherwise it is the range of characters from {low} to {high} (inclusive). *E1111* *E1114* Only characters with value 0x80 and higher can be used. {width} must be either 1 or 2, indicating the character width in screen cells. *E1112* An error is given if the argument is invalid, also when a range overlaps with another. *E1113* If the new value causes 'fillchars' or 'listchars' to become invalid it is rejected and an error is given. To clear the overrides pass an empty {list}: > setcellwidths([]); < You can use the script $VIMRUNTIME/tools/emoji_list.vim to see the effect for known emoji characters. Move the cursor through the text to check if the cell widths of your terminal match with what Vim knows about each emoji. If it doesn't look right you need to adjust the {list} argument. setcharpos({expr}, {list}) *setcharpos()* Same as |setpos()| but uses the specified column number as the character index instead of the byte index in the line. Example: With the text "여보세요" in line 8: > call setcharpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0]) < positions the cursor on the fourth character '요'. > call setpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0]) < positions the cursor on the second character '보'. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPosition()->setcharpos('.') setcharsearch({dict}) *setcharsearch()* Set the current character search information to {dict}, which contains one or more of the following entries: char character which will be used for a subsequent |,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the character search forward direction of character search; 1 for forward, 0 for backward until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T| character search, 0 for an |f| or |F| character search This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search from a script: > :let prevsearch = getcharsearch() :" Perform a command which clobbers user's search :call setcharsearch(prevsearch) < Also see |getcharsearch()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > SavedSearch()->setcharsearch() setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) *setcmdline()* Set the command line to {str} and set the cursor position to {pos}. If {pos} is omitted, the cursor is positioned after the text. Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command line. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->setcmdline() setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()* Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position {pos}. The first position is 1. Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position. Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is set after the command line is set to the expression. For |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but before inserting the resulting text. When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the line. A number smaller than one has undefined results. Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command line. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPos()->setcmdpos() setcursorcharpos({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *setcursorcharpos()* setcursorcharpos({list}) Same as |cursor()| but uses the specified column number as the character index instead of the byte index in the line. Example: With the text "여보세요" in line 4: > call setcursorcharpos(4, 3) < positions the cursor on the third character '세'. > call cursor(4, 3) < positions the cursor on the first character '여'. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCursorPos()->setcursorcharpos() setenv({name}, {val}) *setenv()* Set environment variable {name} to {val}. Example: > call setenv('HOME', '/home/myhome') < When {val} is |v:null| the environment variable is deleted. See also |expr-env|. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetPath()->setenv('PATH') setfperm({fname}, {mode}) *setfperm()* *chmod* Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}. {mode} must be a string with 9 characters. It is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users. A '-' character means the permission is off, any other character means on. Multi-byte characters are not supported. For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user, readable by the group, not accessible by others. "xx-x-----" would do the same thing. Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->setfperm(mode) < To read permissions see |getfperm()|. setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()* Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}. To insert lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use |setbufline()|. Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be added below the last line. {text} can be any type or a List of any type, each item is converted to a String. When {text} is an empty List then nothing is changed and FALSE is returned. If this succeeds, FALSE is returned. If this fails (most likely because {lnum} is invalid) TRUE is returned. In |Vim9| script an error is given if {lnum} is invalid. Example: > :call setline(5, strftime("%c")) < When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines will be set to the items in the list. Example: > :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']) < This is equivalent to: > :for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']] : call setline(n, l) :endfor < Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetText()->setline(lnum) setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setloclist()* Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location list window, the displayed location list is modified. For an invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned. Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|. Also see |location-list|. For {action} see |setqflist-action|. If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then only the items listed in {what} are set. Refer to |setqflist()| for the list of supported keys in {what}. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetLoclist()->setloclist(winnr) setmatches({list} [, {win}]) *setmatches()* Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()| for the current window. Returns 0 if successful, otherwise -1. All current matches are cleared before the list is restored. See example for |getmatches()|. If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or window ID instead of the current window. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMatches()->setmatches() < *setpos()* setpos({expr}, {list}) Set the position for String {expr}. Possible values: . the cursor 'x mark x {list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers: [bufnum, lnum, col, off] [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant] "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the current buffer. When setting an uppercase mark "bufnum" is used for the mark position. For other marks it specifies the buffer to set the mark in. You can use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer number. For setting the cursor and the ' mark "bufnum" is ignored, since these are associated with a window, not a buffer. Does not change the jumplist. "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is smaller than 1 then 1 is used. To use the character count instead of the byte count, use |setcharpos()|. The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last character. The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor position. It sets the preferred column for when moving the cursor vertically. When the "curswant" number is missing the preferred column is not set. When it is present and setting a mark position it is not used. Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always before '>. Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. An error message is given if {expr} is invalid. Also see |setcharpos()|, |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|. This does not restore the preferred column for moving vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and |k| motions will jump to previous columns! Use |cursor()| to also set the preferred column. Also see the "curswant" key in |winrestview()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPosition()->setpos('.') setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setqflist()* Create or replace or add to the quickfix list. If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list} argument is ignored. See below for the supported items in {what}. *setqflist-what* When {what} is not present, the items in {list} are used. Each item must be a dictionary. Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored. Each dictionary item can contain the following entries: bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid buffer filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not present or it is invalid. module name of a module; if given it will be used in quickfix error window instead of the filename. lnum line number in the file end_lnum end of lines, if the item spans multiple lines pattern search pattern used to locate the error col column number vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column when zero: "col" is byte index end_col end column, if the item spans multiple columns nr error number text description of the error type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc. valid recognized error message user_data custom data associated with the item, can be any type. The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to locate a matching error line. If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the item will not be handled as an error line. If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will be used. If the "valid" entry is not supplied, then the valid flag is set when "bufnr" is a valid buffer or "filename" exists. If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be cleared. Note that the list is not exactly the same as what |getqflist()| returns. {action} values: *setqflist-action* *E927* 'a' The items from {list} are added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing list, then a new list is created. 'r' The items from the current quickfix list are replaced with the items from {list}. This can also be used to clear the list: > :call setqflist([], 'r') < 'f' All the quickfix lists in the quickfix stack are freed. If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack, set "nr" in {what} to "$". The following items can be specified in dictionary {what}: context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context| efm errorformat to use when parsing text from "lines". If this is not present, then the 'errorformat' option value is used. See |quickfix-parse| id quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID| idx index of the current entry in the quickfix list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to '$', then the last entry in the list is set as the current entry. See |quickfix-index| items list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list} argument. lines use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and add the resulting entries to the quickfix list {nr} or {id}. Only a |List| value is supported. See |quickfix-parse| nr list number in the quickfix stack; zero means the current quickfix list and "$" means the last quickfix list. quickfixtextfunc function to get the text to display in the quickfix window. The value can be the name of a function or a funcref or a lambda. Refer to |quickfix-window-function| for an explanation of how to write the function and an example. title quickfix list title text. See |quickfix-title| Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored. If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size. When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to specify the list. Examples (See also |setqflist-examples|): > :call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'}) :call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'}) :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':qfid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]}) < Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. This function can be used to create a quickfix list independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like `:cc 1` to jump to the first position. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetErrorlist()->setqflist() < *setreg()* setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}]) Set the register {regname} to {value}. If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used. The {regname} argument is a string. In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. {value} may be any value returned by |getreg()| or |getreginfo()|, including a |List| or |Dict|. If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case, then the value is appended. {options} can also contain a register type specification: "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode "l" or "V" |linewise| mode "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified then the width of the block is set to the number of characters in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character). If {options} contains no register settings, then the default is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise mode is never selected automatically. Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. *E883* Note: you may not use |List| containing more than one item to set search and expression registers. Lists containing no items act like empty strings. Examples: > :call setreg(v:register, @*) :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac') :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5') :call setreg('"', { 'points_to': 'a'}) < This example shows using the functions to save and restore a register: > :let var_a = getreginfo() :call setreg('a', var_a) < or: > :let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1) :let var_amode = getregtype('a') .... :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode) < Note: you may not reliably restore register value without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|. You can also change the type of a register by appending nothing: > :call setreg('a', '', 'al') < Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetText()->setreg('a') settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()* Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}. |t:var| The {varname} argument is a string. Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype'. Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used. Tabs are numbered starting with one. This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetValue()->settabvar(tab, name) settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()* Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to {val}. Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage use |setwinvar()|. {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype' or 'syntax'. This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable. For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged. Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used. Examples: > :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0) :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar") < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the fourth argument: > GetValue()->settabwinvar(tab, winnr, name) settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}]) *settagstack()* Modify the tag stack of the window {nr} using {dict}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. For a list of supported items in {dict}, refer to |gettagstack()|. "curidx" takes effect before changing the tag stack. *E962* How the tag stack is modified depends on the {action} argument: - If {action} is not present or is set to 'r', then the tag stack is replaced. - If {action} is set to 'a', then new entries from {dict} are pushed (added) onto the tag stack. - If {action} is set to 't', then all the entries from the current entry in the tag stack or "curidx" in {dict} are removed and then new entries are pushed to the stack. The current index is set to one after the length of the tag stack after the modification. Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. Examples (for more examples see |tagstack-examples|): Empty the tag stack of window 3: > call settagstack(3, {'items' : []}) < Save and restore the tag stack: > let stack = gettagstack(1003) " do something else call settagstack(1003, stack) unlet stack < Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetStack()->settagstack(winnr) setwinvar({winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()* Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page. Examples: > :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0) :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar") < Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the third argument: > GetValue()->setwinvar(winnr, name) sha256({string}) *sha256()* Returns a String with 64 hex characters, which is the SHA256 checksum of {string}. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->sha256() < {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature} shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()* Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument. When the 'shell' contains powershell (MS-Windows) or pwsh (MS-Windows, Linux, and macOS) then it will enclose {string} in single quotes and will double up all internal single quotes. On MS-Windows, when 'shellslash' is not set, it will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double quotes within {string}. Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and replace all "'" with "'\''". When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!| command. The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg| {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement even when inside single quotes. With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also escaped. When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's escaped a second time. The "\" character will be escaped when 'shell' contains "fish" in the tail. That is because for fish "\" is used as an escape character inside single quotes. Example of use with a |:!| command: > :exe '!dir ' .. shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1) < This results in a directory listing for the file under the cursor. Example of use with |system()|: > :call system("chmod +w -- " .. shellescape(expand("%"))) < See also |::S|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetCommand()->shellescape() shiftwidth([{col}]) *shiftwidth()* Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the 'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the 'tabstop' value. This function was introduced with patch 7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now (however it did not allow for the optional {col} argument until 8.1.542). When there is one argument {col} this is used as column number for which to return the 'shiftwidth' value. This matters for the 'vartabstop' feature. If the 'vartabstop' setting is enabled and no {col} argument is given, column 1 will be assumed. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetColumn()->shiftwidth() sign_ functions are documented here: |sign-functions-details| simplify({filename}) *simplify()* Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in {filename} designates the current directory, this will be valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is not removed either. On Unix "//path" is unchanged, but "///path" is simplified to "/path" (this follows the Posix standard). Example: > simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/" < Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->simplify() sin({expr}) *sin()* Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo sin(100) < -0.506366 > :echo sin(-4.01) < 0.763301 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->sin() sinh({expr}) *sinh()* Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range [-inf, inf]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo sinh(0.5) < 0.521095 > :echo sinh(-0.9) < -1.026517 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->sinh() slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) *slice()* Similar to using a |slice| "expr[start : end]", but "end" is used exclusive. And for a string the indexes are used as character indexes instead of byte indexes, like in |vim9script|. Also, composing characters are not counted. When {end} is omitted the slice continues to the last item. When {end} is -1 the last item is omitted. Returns an empty value if {start} or {end} are invalid. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetList()->slice(offset) sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]]) *sort()* *E702* Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist)) < When {how} is omitted or is a string, then sort() uses the string representation of each item to sort on. Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers. For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|. When {how} is given and it is 'i' then case is ignored. In legacy script, for backwards compatibility, the value one can be used to ignore case. Zero means to not ignore case. When {how} is given and it is 'l' then the current collation locale is used for ordering. Implementation details: strcoll() is used to compare strings. See |:language| check or set the collation locale. |v:collate| can also be used to check the current locale. Sorting using the locale typically ignores case. Example: > " ö is sorted similarly to o with English locale. :language collate en_US.UTF8 :echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l') < ['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'] ~ > " ö is sorted after z with Swedish locale. :language collate sv_SE.UTF8 :echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l') < ['n', 'o', 'O', 'p', 'z', 'ö'] ~ This does not work properly on Mac. When {how} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be sorted numerical (Implementation detail: this uses the strtod() function to parse numbers. Strings, Lists, Dicts and Funcrefs will be considered as being 0). Note that this won't sort a list of strings with numbers! When {how} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing digits will be used as the number they represent. When {how} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float. When {how} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or smaller if the first one sorts before the second one. {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the same order as they were originally. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->sort() < Also see |uniq()|. Example: > func MyCompare(i1, i2) return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1 endfunc eval mylist->sort("MyCompare") < A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which ignores overflow: > func MyCompare(i1, i2) return a:i1 - a:i2 endfunc < For a simple expression you can use a lambda: > eval mylist->sort({i1, i2 -> i1 - i2}) < sound_clear() *sound_clear()* Stop playing all sounds. On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse package, otherwise sound may not stop. {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} *sound_playevent()* sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}]) Play a sound identified by {name}. Which event names are supported depends on the system. Often the XDG sound names are used. On Ubuntu they may be found in /usr/share/sounds/freedesktop/stereo. Example: > call sound_playevent('bell') < On MS-Windows, {name} can be SystemAsterisk, SystemDefault, SystemExclamation, SystemExit, SystemHand, SystemQuestion, SystemStart, SystemWelcome, etc. On macOS, {name} refers to files located in /System/Library/Sounds (e.g. "Tink"). It will also work for custom installed sounds in folders like ~/Library/Sounds. When {callback} is specified it is invoked when the sound is finished. The first argument is the sound ID, the second argument is the status: 0 sound was played to the end 1 sound was interrupted 2 error occurred after sound started Example: > func Callback(id, status) echomsg "sound " .. a:id .. " finished with " .. a:status endfunc call sound_playevent('bell', 'Callback') < MS-Windows: {callback} doesn't work for this function. Returns the sound ID, which can be passed to `sound_stop()`. Returns zero if the sound could not be played. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetSoundName()->sound_playevent() < {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} *sound_playfile()* sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}]) Like `sound_playevent()` but play sound file {path}. {path} must be a full path. On Ubuntu you may find files to play with this command: > :!find /usr/share/sounds -type f | grep -v index.theme < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetSoundPath()->sound_playfile() < {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} sound_stop({id}) *sound_stop()* Stop playing sound {id}. {id} must be previously returned by `sound_playevent()` or `sound_playfile()`. On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse package, otherwise sound may not stop. On MS-Windows, this does not work for event sound started by `sound_playevent()`. To stop event sounds, use `sound_clear()`. Can also be used as a |method|: > soundid->sound_stop() < {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} *soundfold()* soundfold({word}) Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is possible the {word} is returned unmodified. This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that the method can be quite slow. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWord()->soundfold() < *spellbadword()* spellbadword([{sentence}]) Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move. With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the result is an empty string. The return value is a list with two items: - The badly spelled word or an empty string. - The type of the spelling error: "bad" spelling mistake "rare" rare word "local" word only valid in another region "caps" word should start with Capital Example: > echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox") < ['quik', 'bad'] ~ The spelling information for the current window and the value of 'spelllang' are used. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->spellbadword() < *spellsuggest()* spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}. When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned. When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this after a match with 'spellcapcheck'. {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text. This allows for joining two words that were split. The suggestions also include the following text, thus you can replace a line. {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions, although it may appear capitalized. The spelling information for the current window is used. The values of 'spelllang' and 'spellsuggest' are used. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWord()->spellsuggest() split({string} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()* Make a |List| out of {string}. When {pattern} is omitted or empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an item. Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches, removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c| When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero. Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one character or when {keepempty} is non-zero. Example: > :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+') < To split a string in individual characters: > :for c in split(mystring, '\zs') < If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at the end of the pattern: > :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs') < ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~ Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: > :let items = split(line, ':', 1) < The opposite function is |join()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->split() sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()* Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a |Float|. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr} is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number). Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo sqrt(100) < 10.0 > :echo sqrt(-4.01) < nan "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries. Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->sqrt() srand([{expr}]) *srand()* Initialize seed used by |rand()|: - If {expr} is not given, seed values are initialized by reading from /dev/urandom, if possible, or using time(NULL) a.k.a. epoch time otherwise; this only has second accuracy. - If {expr} is given it must be a Number. It is used to initialize the seed values. This is useful for testing or when a predictable sequence is intended. Examples: > :let seed = srand() :let seed = srand(userinput) :echo rand(seed) state([{what}]) *state()* Return a string which contains characters indicating the current state. Mostly useful in callbacks that want to do work that may not always be safe. Roughly this works like: - callback uses state() to check if work is safe to do. Yes: then do it right away. No: add to work queue and add a |SafeState| and/or |SafeStateAgain| autocommand (|SafeState| triggers at toplevel, |SafeStateAgain| triggers after handling messages and callbacks). - When SafeState or SafeStateAgain is triggered and executes your autocommand, check with `state()` if the work can be done now, and if yes remove it from the queue and execute. Remove the autocommand if the queue is now empty. Also see |mode()|. When {what} is given only characters in this string will be added. E.g, this checks if the screen has scrolled: > if state('s') == '' " screen has not scrolled < These characters indicate the state, generally indicating that something is busy: m halfway a mapping, :normal command, feedkeys() or stuffed command o operator pending, e.g. after |d| a Insert mode autocomplete active x executing an autocommand w blocked on waiting, e.g. ch_evalexpr(), ch_read() and ch_readraw() when reading json S not triggering SafeState or SafeStateAgain, e.g. after |f| or a count c callback invoked, including timer (repeats for recursiveness up to "ccc") s screen has scrolled for messages str2float({string} [, {quoted}]) *str2float()* Convert String {string} to a Float. This mostly works the same as when using a floating point number in an expression, see |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive. E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to write "1.0e40". The hexadecimal form "0x123" is also accepted, but not others, like binary or octal. When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single quotes before the dot are ignored, thus "1'000.0" is a thousand. Text after the number is silently ignored. The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with |substitute()|: > let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g')) < Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails. Can also be used as a |method|: > let f = text->substitute(',', '', 'g')->str2float() str2list({string} [, {utf8}]) *str2list()* Return a list containing the number values which represent each character in String {string}. Examples: > str2list(" ") returns [32] str2list("ABC") returns [65, 66, 67] < |list2str()| does the opposite. When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat the String as UTF-8 characters. With UTF-8 composing characters are handled properly: > str2list("á") returns [97, 769] < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->str2list() str2nr({string} [, {base} [, {quoted}]]) *str2nr()* Convert string {string} to a number. {base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16. When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single quotes are ignored, thus "1'000'000" is a million. When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as with the default String to Number conversion. Example: > let nr = str2nr('0123') < When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a different base the result will be zero. Similarly, when {base} is 8 a leading "0", "0o" or "0O" is ignored, and when {base} is 2 a leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored. Text after the number is silently ignored. Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->str2nr() strcharlen({string}) *strcharlen()* The result is a Number, which is the number of characters in String {string}. Composing characters are ignored. |strchars()| can count the number of characters, counting composing characters separately. Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error. Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strcharlen() strcharpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]]) *strcharpart()* Like |strpart()| but using character index and length instead of byte index and length. When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are counted separately. When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored, similar to |slice()|. When a character index is used where a character does not exist it is omitted and counted as one character. For example: > strcharpart('abc', -1, 2) < results in 'a'. Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strcharpart(5) strchars({string} [, {skipcc}]) *strchars()* The result is a Number, which is the number of characters in String {string}. When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are counted separately. When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored. |strcharlen()| always does this. Returns zero on error. Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. {skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755. For backward compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: > if has("patch-7.4.755") function s:strchars(str, skipcc) return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc) endfunction else function s:strchars(str, skipcc) if a:skipcc return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g")) else return strchars(a:str) endif endfunction endif < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strchars() strdisplaywidth({string} [, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()* The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells String {string} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col} (first column is zero). When {col} is omitted zero is used. Otherwise it is the screen column where to start. This matters for Tab characters. The option settings of the current window are used. This matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as 'tabstop' and 'display'. When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. Returns zero on error. Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strdisplaywidth() strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()* The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used, or the current time if no time is given. The accepted {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable! See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters. See also |localtime()|, |getftime()| and |strptime()|. The language can be changed with the |:language| command. Examples: > :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997 :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25 :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55 :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55 :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c")) Show mod time of file.c. < Not available on all systems. To check use: > :if exists("*strftime") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFormat()->strftime() strgetchar({str}, {index}) *strgetchar()* Get a Number corresponding to the character at {index} in {str}. This uses a zero-based character index, not a byte index. Composing characters are considered separate characters here. Use |nr2char()| to convert the Number to a String. Returns -1 if {index} is invalid. Also see |strcharpart()| and |strchars()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strgetchar(5) stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()* The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}. If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}. This can be used to find a second match: > :let colon1 = stridx(line, ":") :let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1) < The search is done case-sensitive. For pattern searches use |match()|. -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. See also |strridx()|. Examples: > :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3 :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0 :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1 < *strstr()* *strchr()* stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used with a single character it works similar to strchr(). Can also be used as a |method|: > GetHaystack()->stridx(needle) < *string()* string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number, Float, String, Blob or a composition of them, then the result can be parsed back with |eval()|. {expr} type result ~ String 'string' (single quotes are doubled) Number 123 Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8 Funcref function('name') Blob 0z00112233.44556677.8899 List [item, item] Dictionary {key: value, key: value} Class class SomeName Object object of SomeName {lnum: 1, col: 3} When a |List| or |Dictionary| has a recursive reference it is replaced by "[...]" or "{...}". Using eval() on the result will then fail. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->string() < Also see |strtrans()|. strlen({string}) *strlen()* The result is a Number, which is the length of the String {string} in bytes. If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String. For other types an error is given and zero is returned. If you want to count the number of multibyte characters use |strchars()|. Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->strlen() strpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]]) *strpart()* The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from byte {start}, with the byte length {len}. When {chars} is present and TRUE then {len} is the number of characters positions (composing characters are not counted separately, thus "1" means one base character and any following composing characters). To count {start} as characters instead of bytes use |strcharpart()|. When bytes are selected which do not exist, this doesn't result in an error, the bytes are simply omitted. If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the end of the {src}. > strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de" strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab" strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg" strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg" < Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For example, to get the character under the cursor: > strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 1, v:true) < Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strpart(5) strptime({format}, {timestring}) *strptime()* The result is a Number, which is a unix timestamp representing the date and time in {timestring}, which is expected to match the format specified in {format}. The accepted {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable! See the manual page of the C function strptime() for the format. Especially avoid "%c". The value of $TZ also matters. If the {timestring} cannot be parsed with {format} zero is returned. If you do not know the format of {timestring} you can try different {format} values until you get a non-zero result. See also |strftime()|. Examples: > :echo strptime("%Y %b %d %X", "1997 Apr 27 11:49:23") < 862156163 > :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%y%m%d %T", "970427 11:53:55")) < Sun Apr 27 11:53:55 1997 > :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%Y%m%d%H%M%S", "19970427115355") + 3600) < Sun Apr 27 12:53:55 1997 Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFormat()->strptime(timestring) < Not available on all systems. To check use: > :if exists("*strptime") strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()* The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}. When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous match: > :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",") :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1) < The search is done case-sensitive. For pattern searches use |match()|. -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned. See also |stridx()|. Examples: > :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3 < *strrchr()* When used with a single character it works similar to the C function strrchr(). Can also be used as a |method|: > GetHaystack()->strridx(needle) strtrans({string}) *strtrans()* The result is a String, which is {string} with all unprintable characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|. Like they are shown in a window. Example: > echo strtrans(@a) < This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of starting a new line. Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->strtrans() strutf16len({string} [, {countcc}]) *strutf16len()* The result is a Number, which is the number of UTF-16 code units in String {string} (after converting it to UTF-16). When {countcc} is TRUE, composing characters are counted separately. When {countcc} is omitted or FALSE, composing characters are ignored. Returns zero on error. Also see |strlen()| and |strcharlen()|. Examples: > echo strutf16len('a') returns 1 echo strutf16len('©') returns 1 echo strutf16len('😊') returns 2 echo strutf16len('ą́') returns 1 echo strutf16len('ą́', v:true) returns 3 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->strutf16len() < strwidth({string}) *strwidth()* The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells String {string} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|. When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. Returns zero on error. Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->strwidth() submatch({nr} [, {list}]) *submatch()* *E935* Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or substitute() function. Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} is 0 the whole matched text is returned. Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a multi-line match or a NUL character in the text. Also see |sub-replace-expression|. If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments. NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the text. Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside |substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero items, since there are no real line breaks. When substitute() is used recursively only the submatches in the current (deepest) call can be obtained. Returns an empty string or list on error. Examples: > :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/ :echo substitute(text, '\d\+', '\=submatch(0) + 1', '') < This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it. A line break is included as a newline character. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetNr()->submatch() substitute({string}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()* The result is a String, which is a copy of {string}, in which the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {string} are replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "". This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts portable). 'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C| if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'. 'smartcase' is not used. See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}. Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'. When {pat} does not match in {string}, {string} is returned unmodified. Example: > :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "") < This removes the last component of the 'path' option. > :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "") < results in "TESTING". When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|. Example: > :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', \ '\=nr2char("0x" .. submatch(1))', 'g') < When {sub} is a Funcref that function is called, with one optional argument. Example: > :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', SubNr, 'g') < The optional argument is a list which contains the whole matched string and up to nine submatches, like what |submatch()| returns. Example: > :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', {m -> '0x' .. m[1]}, 'g') < Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetString()->substitute(pat, sub, flags) swapfilelist() *swapfilelist()* Returns a list of swap file names, like what "vim -r" shows. See the |-r| command argument. The 'directory' option is used for the directories to inspect. If you only want to get a list of swap files in the current directory then temporarily set 'directory' to a dot: > let save_dir = &directory let &directory = '.' let swapfiles = swapfilelist() let &directory = save_dir swapinfo({fname}) *swapinfo()* The result is a dictionary, which holds information about the swapfile {fname}. The available fields are: version Vim version user user name host host name fname original file name pid PID of the Vim process that created the swap file mtime last modification time in seconds inode Optional: INODE number of the file dirty 1 if file was modified, 0 if not Note that "user" and "host" are truncated to at most 39 bytes. In case of failure an "error" item is added with the reason: Cannot open file: file not found or in accessible Cannot read file: cannot read first block Not a swap file: does not contain correct block ID Magic number mismatch: Info in first block is invalid Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->swapinfo() swapname({buf}) *swapname()* The result is the swap file path of the buffer {expr}. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, the result is equal to |:swapname| (unless there is no swap file). If buffer {buf} has no swap file, returns an empty string. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufname()->swapname() synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()* The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text. {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned. Note that when the position is after the last character, that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns zero. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. When {trans} is |TRUE|, transparent items are reduced to the item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know the effective color. When {trans} is |FALSE|, the transparent item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens). Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is obtained by going through the file in forward direction. Returns zero on error. Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): > :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name") < synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()* The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information about a syntax item. {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are used (GUI, cterm or term). Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups. {what} result "name" the name of the syntax item "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set the color, cterm: color number as a string, term: empty string) "bg" background color (as with "fg") "font" font name (only available in the GUI) |highlight-font| "sp" special color for the GUI (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp| "ul" underline color for cterm: number as a string "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is running the name in "#RRGGBB" form "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg" "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp" "bold" "1" if bold "italic" "1" if italic "reverse" "1" if reverse "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse) "standout" "1" if standout "underline" "1" if underlined "undercurl" "1" if undercurled "strike" "1" if strikethrough "nocombine" "1" if nocombine Returns an empty string on error. Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the cursor): > :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg") < Can also be used as a |method|: > :echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg") synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()* The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to highlight the character. Highlight links given with ":highlight link" are followed. Returns zero on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > :echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg") synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()* The result is a |List| with currently three items: 1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable region, 1 if it is. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. 2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'. 3. The third and final item in the list is a number representing the specific syntax region matched in the line. When the character is not concealed the value is zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new concealable region if there are two consecutive regions with the same replacement character. For an example, if the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed and replaced by the character "X", then: call returns ~ synconcealed(lnum, 1) [0, '', 0] synconcealed(lnum, 2) [1, 'X', 1] synconcealed(lnum, 3) [1, 'X', 1] synconcealed(lnum, 4) [1, 'X', 2] synconcealed(lnum, 5) [1, 'X', 2] synconcealed(lnum, 6) [0, '', 0] synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()* Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Each item in the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns. The first item in the List is the outer region, following are items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()| returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a transparent item. This function is useful for debugging a syntax file. Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: > for id in synstack(line("."), col(".")) echo synIDattr(id, "name") endfor < When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid an empty List is returned. The position just after the last character in a line and the first column in an empty line are valid positions. system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677* Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a |String|. See |systemlist()| to get the output as a |List|. When {input} is given and is a |String| this string is written to a file and passed as stdin to the command. The string is written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line separators yourself. If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e. with a newline between each list item with newlines inside list items converted to NULs). When {input} is given and is a number that is a valid id for an existing buffer then the content of the buffer is written to the file line by line, each line terminated by a NL and NULs characters where the text has a NL. Pipes are not used, the 'shelltemp' option is not used. When prepended by |:silent| the terminal will not be set to cooked mode. This is meant to be used for commands that do not need the user to type. It avoids stray characters showing up on the screen which require |CTRL-L| to remove. > :silent let f = system('ls *.vim') < Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or |fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail. The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also cause trouble. This is not to be used for interactive commands. The result is a String. Example: > :let files = system('ls ' .. shellescape(expand('%:h'))) :let files = system('ls ' .. expand('%:h:S')) < To make the result more system-independent, the shell output is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems. To avoid the string being truncated at a NUL, all NUL characters are replaced with SOH (0x01). The command executed is constructed using several options: 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote' ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name). For Unix, braces are put around {expr} to allow for concatenated commands. The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least). The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|. This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail when using a security agent application. Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files. Use |:checktime| to force a check. Can also be used as a |method|: > :echo GetCmd()->system() systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) *systemlist()* Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument set to "b", except that there is no extra empty item when the result ends in a NL. Note that on MS-Windows you may get trailing CR characters. To see the difference between "echo hello" and "echo -n hello" use |system()| and |split()|: > echo system('echo hello')->split('\n', 1) < Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > :echo GetCmd()->systemlist() tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()* The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the buffer associated with each window in the current tab page. {arg} specifies the number of the tab page to be used. When omitted the current tab page is used. When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned. To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: > let buflist = [] for i in range(tabpagenr('$')) call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1)) endfor < Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabpage()->tabpagebuflist() tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()* The result is a Number, which is the number of the current tab page. The first tab page has number 1. The optional argument {arg} supports the following values: $ the number of the last tab page (the tab page count). # the number of the last accessed tab page (where |g<Tab>| goes to). if there is no previous tab page 0 is returned. The number can be used with the |:tab| command. Returns zero on error. tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()* Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}. {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. {arg} is used like with |winnr()|: - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is the window which will be used when going to this tab page. - When "$" the number of windows is returned. - When "#" the previous window nr is returned. Useful examples: > tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1 tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4 < When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabpage()->tabpagewinnr() < *tagfiles()* tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded. taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) *taglist()* Returns a |List| of tags matching the regular expression {expr}. If {filename} is passed it is used to prioritize the results in the same way that |:tselect| does. See |tag-priority|. {filename} should be the full path of the file. Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following entries: name Name of the tag. filename Name of the file where the tag is defined. It is either relative to the current directory or a full path. cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in the file. kind Type of the tag. The value for this entry depends on the language specific kind values. Only available when using a tags file generated by Universal/Exuberant ctags or hdrtag. static A file specific tag. Refer to |static-tag| for more information. More entries may be present, depending on the content of the tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature. Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum" may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is contained in. The ex-command "cmd" can be either an ex search pattern, a line number or a line number followed by a byte number. If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned. To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be used in {expr}. This also make the function work faster. Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag search regular expression pattern. Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of the tags file generated by the different ctags tools. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTagpattern()->taglist() tan({expr}) *tan()* Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float| in the range [-inf, inf]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo tan(10) < 0.648361 > :echo tan(-4.01) < -1.181502 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->tan() tanh({expr}) *tanh()* Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the range [-1, 1]. {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > :echo tanh(0.5) < 0.462117 > :echo tanh(-1) < -0.761594 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->tanh() tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name* The result is a String, which is the name of a file that doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: > :let tmpfile = tempname() :exe "redir > " .. tmpfile < For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|. For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash' option is set, or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-' and 'shell' does not contain powershell or pwsh. term_ functions are documented here: |terminal-function-details| terminalprops() *terminalprops()* Returns a |Dictionary| with properties of the terminal that Vim detected from the response to |t_RV| request. See |v:termresponse| for the response itself. If |v:termresponse| is empty most values here will be 'u' for unknown. cursor_style whether sending |t_RS| works ** cursor_blink_mode whether sending |t_RC| works ** underline_rgb whether |t_8u| works ** mouse mouse type supported kitty whether Kitty terminal was detected ** value 'u' for unknown, 'y' for yes, 'n' for no If the |+termresponse| feature is missing then the result is an empty dictionary. If "cursor_style" is 'y' then |t_RS| will be sent to request the current cursor style. If "cursor_blink_mode" is 'y' then |t_RC| will be sent to request the cursor blink status. "cursor_style" and "cursor_blink_mode" are also set if |t_u7| is not empty, Vim will detect the working of sending |t_RS| and |t_RC| on startup. When "underline_rgb" is not 'y', then |t_8u| will be made empty. This avoids sending it to xterm, which would clear the colors. For "mouse" the value 'u' is unknown Also see: - 'ambiwidth' - detected by using |t_u7|. - |v:termstyleresp| and |v:termblinkresp| for the response to |t_RS| and |t_RC|. test_ functions are documented here: |test-functions-details| *timer_info()* timer_info([{id}]) Return a list with information about timers. When {id} is given only information about this timer is returned. When timer {id} does not exist an empty list is returned. When {id} is omitted information about all timers is returned. For each timer the information is stored in a |Dictionary| with these items: "id" the timer ID "time" time the timer was started with "remaining" time until the timer fires "repeat" number of times the timer will still fire; -1 means forever "callback" the callback "paused" 1 if the timer is paused, 0 otherwise Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTimer()->timer_info() < {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} timer_pause({timer}, {paused}) *timer_pause()* Pause or unpause a timer. A paused timer does not invoke its callback when its time expires. Unpausing a timer may cause the callback to be invoked almost immediately if enough time has passed. Pausing a timer is useful to avoid the callback to be called for a short time. If {paused} evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty String, then the timer is paused, otherwise it is unpaused. See |non-zero-arg|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTimer()->timer_pause(1) < {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} *timer_start()* *timer* *timers* timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}]) Create a timer and return the timer ID. {time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the minimum time before invoking the callback. When the system is busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer. Zero can be used to execute the callback when Vim is back in the main loop. {callback} is the function to call. It can be the name of a function or a |Funcref|. It is called with one argument, which is the timer ID. The callback is only invoked when Vim is waiting for input. If you want to show a message look at |popup_notification()| to avoid interfering with what the user is doing. {options} is a dictionary. Supported entries: "repeat" Number of times to repeat calling the callback. -1 means forever. When not present the callback will be called once. If the timer causes an error three times in a row the repeat is cancelled. This avoids that Vim becomes unusable because of all the error messages. Returns -1 on error. Example: > func MyHandler(timer) echo 'Handler called' endfunc let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler', \ {'repeat': 3}) < This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec intervals. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetMsec()->timer_start(callback) < Not available in the |sandbox|. {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} timer_stop({timer}) *timer_stop()* Stop a timer. The timer callback will no longer be invoked. {timer} is an ID returned by timer_start(), thus it must be a Number. If {timer} does not exist there is no error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTimer()->timer_stop() < {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} timer_stopall() *timer_stopall()* Stop all timers. The timer callbacks will no longer be invoked. Useful if a timer is misbehaving. If there are no timers there is no error. {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} tolower({expr}) *tolower()* The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to the string). Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->tolower() toupper({expr}) *toupper()* The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to the string). Returns an empty string on error. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->toupper() tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()* The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr} and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command. This code also deals with multibyte characters properly. Returns an empty string on error. Examples: > echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT") < returns "Hello THere" > echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}") < returns "{blob}" Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->tr(from, to) trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]]) *trim()* Return {text} as a String where any character in {mask} is removed from the beginning and/or end of {text}. If {mask} is not given, or is an empty string, {mask} is all characters up to 0x20, which includes Tab, space, NL and CR, plus the non-breaking space character 0xa0. The optional {dir} argument specifies where to remove the characters: 0 remove from the beginning and end of {text} 1 remove only at the beginning of {text} 2 remove only at the end of {text} When omitted both ends are trimmed. This function deals with multibyte characters properly. Returns an empty string on error. Examples: > echo trim(" some text ") < returns "some text" > echo trim(" \r\t\t\r RESERVE \t\n\x0B\xA0") .. "_TAIL" < returns "RESERVE_TAIL" > echo trim("rm<Xrm<>X>rrm", "rm<>") < returns "Xrm<>X" (characters in the middle are not removed) > echo trim(" vim ", " ", 2) < returns " vim" Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->trim() trunc({expr}) *trunc()* Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero). {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. Examples: > echo trunc(1.456) < 1.0 > echo trunc(-5.456) < -5.0 > echo trunc(4.0) < 4.0 Can also be used as a |method|: > Compute()->trunc() < *type()* type({expr}) The result is a Number representing the type of {expr}. Instead of using the number directly, it is better to use the v:t_ variable that has the value: Number: 0 |v:t_number| String: 1 |v:t_string| Funcref: 2 |v:t_func| List: 3 |v:t_list| Dictionary: 4 |v:t_dict| Float: 5 |v:t_float| Boolean: 6 |v:t_bool| (v:false and v:true) None: 7 |v:t_none| (v:null and v:none) Job: 8 |v:t_job| Channel: 9 |v:t_channel| Blob: 10 |v:t_blob| Class: 12 |v:t_class| Object: 13 |v:t_object| Typealias: 14 |v:t_typealias| For backward compatibility, this method can be used: > :if type(myvar) == type(0) :if type(myvar) == type("") :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr")) :if type(myvar) == type([]) :if type(myvar) == type({}) :if type(myvar) == type(0.0) :if type(myvar) == type(v:false) :if type(myvar) == type(v:none) < To check if the v:t_ variables exist use this: > :if exists('v:t_number') < Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->type() typename({expr}) *typename()* Return a string representation of the type of {expr}. Example: > echo typename([1, 2, 3]) < list<number> ~ undofile({name}) *undofile()* Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir' option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if the undo file exists. {name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what is used internally. If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a buffer without a file name will not write an undo file. Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|. When compiled without the |+persistent_undo| option this always returns an empty string. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetFilename()->undofile() undotree([{buf}]) *undotree()* Return the current state of the undo tree for the current buffer, or for a specific buffer if {buf} is given. The result is a dictionary with the following items: "seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used. "seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last" when some changes were undone. "time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to something readable. "save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no write yet. "save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo tree. "synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced. This happens when waiting from input from the user. See |undo-blocks|. "entries" A list of dictionaries with information about undo blocks. The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item. Each List item is a |Dictionary| with these items: "seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in |:undolist|. "time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use |strftime()| to convert to something readable. "newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one that was added. This marks the last change and where further changes will be added. "curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one that was undone. This marks the current position in the undo tree, the block that will be used by a redo command. When nothing was undone after the last change this item will not appear anywhere. "save" Only appears on the last block before a file write. The number is the write count. The first write has number 1, the last one the "save_last" mentioned above. "alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo blocks. Each item may again have an "alt" item. uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) *uniq()* *E882* Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent {list} items in-place. Returns {list}. If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > :let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist)) < The default compare function uses the string representation of each item. For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|. Returns zero if {list} is not a |List|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mylist->uniq() < *utf16idx()* utf16idx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc} [, {charidx}]]) Same as |charidx()| but returns the UTF-16 code unit index of the byte at {idx} in {string} (after converting it to UTF-16). When {charidx} is present and TRUE, {idx} is used as the character index in the String {string} instead of as the byte index. An {idx} in the middle of a UTF-8 sequence is rounded downwards to the beginning of that sequence. Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid or if there are less than {idx} bytes in {string}. If there are exactly {idx} bytes the length of the string in UTF-16 code units is returned. See |byteidx()| and |byteidxcomp()| for getting the byte index from the UTF-16 index and |charidx()| for getting the character index from the UTF-16 index. Refer to |string-offset-encoding| for more information. Examples: > echo utf16idx('a😊😊', 3) returns 2 echo utf16idx('a😊😊', 7) returns 4 echo utf16idx('a😊😊', 1, 0, 1) returns 2 echo utf16idx('a😊😊', 2, 0, 1) returns 4 echo utf16idx('aą́c', 6) returns 2 echo utf16idx('aą́c', 6, 1) returns 4 echo utf16idx('a😊😊', 9) returns -1 < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetName()->utf16idx(idx) values({dict}) *values()* Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is in arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |keys()|. Returns zero if {dict} is not a |Dict|. Can also be used as a |method|: > mydict->values() virtcol({expr} [, {list} [, {winid}]]) *virtcol()* The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position occupied by the character at that position, when the screen would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts' set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored. For the byte position use |col()|. For the use of {expr} see |col()|. When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last character. When "off" is omitted zero is used. When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position beyond the end of the line can be returned. Also see |'virtualedit'| The accepted positions are: . the cursor position $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the number of displayed characters in the cursor line plus one) 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is returned) v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in that it's updated right away. If {list} is present and non-zero then virtcol() returns a List with the first and last screen position occupied by the character. With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for that window instead of the current window. Note that only marks in the current file can be used. Examples: > " With text "foo^Lbar" and cursor on the "^L": virtcol(".") " returns 5 virtcol(".", 1) " returns [4, 5] virtcol("$") " returns 9 " With text " there", with 't at 'h': virtcol("'t") " returns 6 < The first column is 1. 0 or [0, 0] is returned for an error. A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of all lines: > echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])")) < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetPos()->virtcol() virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *virtcol2col()* The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and virtual column {col}. If buffer line {lnum} is an empty line, 0 is returned. If {col} is greater than the last virtual column in line {lnum}, then the byte index of the character at the last virtual column is returned. For a multi-byte character, the column number of the first byte in the character is returned. The {winid} argument can be the window number or the |window-ID|. If this is zero, then the current window is used. Returns -1 if the window {winid} doesn't exist or the buffer line {lnum} or virtual column {col} is invalid. See also |screenpos()|, |virtcol()| and |col()|. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->virtcol2col(lnum, col) visualmode([{expr}]) *visualmode()* The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v", "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode respectively. Example: > :exe "normal " .. visualmode() < This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the Visual mode that was used. If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode (e.g., in a |:vmap|). If {expr} is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and the old value is returned. See |non-zero-arg|. wildmenumode() *wildmenumode()* Returns |TRUE| when the wildmenu is active and |FALSE| otherwise. See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'. This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings). For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: > :cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>" < (Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately). win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}]) *win_execute()* Like `execute()` but in the context of window {id}. The window will temporarily be made the current window, without triggering autocommands or changing directory. When executing {command} autocommands will be triggered, this may have unexpected side effects. Use `:noautocmd` if needed. Example: > call win_execute(winid, 'set syntax=python') < Doing the same with `setwinvar()` would not trigger autocommands and not actually show syntax highlighting. *E994* Not all commands are allowed in popup windows. When window {id} does not exist then no error is given and an empty string is returned. Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the second argument: > GetCommand()->win_execute(winid) win_findbuf({bufnr}) *win_findbuf()* Returns a |List| with |window-ID|s for windows that contain buffer {bufnr}. When there is none the list is empty. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetBufnr()->win_findbuf() win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) *win_getid()* Get the |window-ID| for the specified window. When {win} is missing use the current window. With {win} this is the window number. The top window has number 1. Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with number {tab}. The first tab has number one. Return zero if the window cannot be found. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->win_getid() win_gettype([{nr}]) *win_gettype()* Return the type of the window: "autocmd" autocommand window. Temporary window used to execute autocommands. "command" command-line window |cmdwin| (empty) normal window "loclist" |location-list-window| "popup" popup window |popup| "preview" preview window |preview-window| "quickfix" |quickfix-window| "unknown" window {nr} not found When {nr} is omitted return the type of the current window. When {nr} is given return the type of this window by number or |window-ID|. Also see the 'buftype' option. When running a terminal in a popup window then 'buftype' is "terminal" and win_gettype() returns "popup". Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_gettype() < win_gotoid({expr}) *win_gotoid()* Go to window with ID {expr}. This may also change the current tabpage. Return TRUE if successful, FALSE if the window cannot be found. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_gotoid() win_id2tabwin({expr}) *win_id2tabwin()* Return a list with the tab number and window number of window with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr]. Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_id2tabwin() win_id2win({expr}) *win_id2win()* Return the window number of window with ID {expr}. Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_id2win() win_move_separator({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_separator()* Move window {nr}'s vertical separator (i.e., the right border) by {offset} columns, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr} can be a window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset} moves right and a negative {offset} moves left. Moving a window's vertical separator will change the width of the window and the width of other windows adjacent to the vertical separator. The magnitude of movement may be smaller than specified (e.g., as a consequence of maintaining 'winminwidth'). Returns TRUE if the window can be found and FALSE otherwise. This will fail for the rightmost window and a full-width window, since it has no separator on the right. Only works for the current tab page. *E1308* Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->win_move_separator(offset) win_move_statusline({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_statusline()* Move window {nr}'s status line (i.e., the bottom border) by {offset} rows, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr} can be a window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset} moves down and a negative {offset} moves up. Moving a window's status line will change the height of the window and the height of other windows adjacent to the status line. The magnitude of movement may be smaller than specified (e.g., as a consequence of maintaining 'winminheight'). Returns TRUE if the window can be found and FALSE otherwise. Only works for the current tab page. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinnr()->win_move_statusline(offset) win_screenpos({nr}) *win_screenpos()* Return the screen position of window {nr} as a list with two numbers: [row, col]. The first window always has position [1, 1], unless there is a tabline, then it is [2, 1]. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. Use zero for the current window. Returns [0, 0] if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_screenpos() < win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}]) *win_splitmove()* Move the window {nr} to a new split of the window {target}. This is similar to moving to {target}, creating a new window using |:split| but having the same contents as window {nr}, and then closing {nr}. Both {nr} and {target} can be window numbers or |window-ID|s. Both must be in the current tab page. Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. {options} is a |Dictionary| with the following optional entries: "vertical" When TRUE, the split is created vertically, like with |:vsplit|. "rightbelow" When TRUE, the split is made below or to the right (if vertical). When FALSE, it is done above or to the left (if vertical). When not present, the values of 'splitbelow' and 'splitright' are used. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->win_splitmove(target) < *winbufnr()* winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer associated with window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {nr} is zero, the number of the buffer in the current window is returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Example: > :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0)) < Can also be used as a |method|: > FindWindow()->winbufnr()->bufname() < *wincol()* wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the left side of the window. The leftmost column is one. *windowsversion()* windowsversion() The result is a String. For MS-Windows it indicates the OS version. E.g, Windows 10 is "10.0", Windows 8 is "6.2", Windows XP is "5.1". For non-MS-Windows systems the result is an empty string. winheight({nr}) *winheight()* The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. An existing window always has a height of zero or more. This excludes any window toolbar line. Examples: > :echo "The current window has " .. winheight(0) .. " lines." < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->winheight() < winlayout([{tabnr}]) *winlayout()* The result is a nested List containing the layout of windows in a tabpage. Without {tabnr} use the current tabpage, otherwise the tabpage with number {tabnr}. If the tabpage {tabnr} is not found, returns an empty list. For a leaf window, it returns: ['leaf', {winid}] For horizontally split windows, which form a column, it returns: ['col', [{nested list of windows}]] For vertically split windows, which form a row, it returns: ['row', [{nested list of windows}]] Example: > " Only one window in the tab page :echo winlayout() ['leaf', 1000] " Two horizontally split windows :echo winlayout() ['col', [['leaf', 1000], ['leaf', 1001]]] " The second tab page, with three horizontally split " windows, with two vertically split windows in the " middle window :echo winlayout(2) ['col', [['leaf', 1002], ['row', [['leaf', 1003], ['leaf', 1001]]], ['leaf', 1000]]] < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetTabnr()->winlayout() < *winline()* winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of the window. The first line is one. If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated first, this may cause a scroll. *winnr()* winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current window. The top window has number 1. Returns zero for a popup window. The optional argument {arg} supports the following values: $ the number of the last window (the window count). # the number of the last accessed window (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to). If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0 is returned. {N}j the number of the Nth window below the current window (where |CTRL-W_j| goes to). {N}k the number of the Nth window above the current window (where |CTRL-W_k| goes to). {N}h the number of the Nth window left of the current window (where |CTRL-W_h| goes to). {N}l the number of the Nth window right of the current window (where |CTRL-W_l| goes to). The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" |:wincmd|. When {arg} is invalid an error is given and zero is returned. Also see |tabpagewinnr()| and |win_getid()|. Examples: > let window_count = winnr('$') let prev_window = winnr('#') let wnum = winnr('3k') < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinval()->winnr() < *winrestcmd()* winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is unchanged. Example: > :let cmd = winrestcmd() :call MessWithWindowSizes() :exe cmd < *winrestview()* winrestview({dict}) Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore the view of the current window. Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those settings won't be restored. So you can use: > :call winrestview({'curswant': 4}) < This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5 (yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually. If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable. If the window size changed the result won't be the same. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetView()->winrestview() < *winsaveview()* winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to restore the view. This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the buffer and you want to go back to the original view. This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable' option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are not opened when moving around. This may have side effects. The return value includes: lnum cursor line number col cursor column (Note: the first column zero, as opposed to what |getcurpos()| returns) coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit' curswant column for vertical movement (Note: the first column is zero, as opposed to what |getcurpos()| returns). After |$| command it will be a very large number equal to |v:maxcol|. topline first line in the window topfill filler lines, only in diff mode leftcol first column displayed; only used when 'wrap' is off skipcol columns skipped Note that no option values are saved. winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()* The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. An existing window always has a width of zero or more. Examples: > :echo "The current window has " .. winwidth(0) .. " columns." :if winwidth(0) <= 50 : 50 wincmd | :endif < For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns' option. Can also be used as a |method|: > GetWinid()->winwidth() wordcount() *wordcount()* The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for the current buffer. This is the same info as provided by |g_CTRL-G| The return value includes: bytes Number of bytes in the buffer chars Number of chars in the buffer words Number of words in the buffer cursor_bytes Number of bytes before cursor position (not in Visual mode) cursor_chars Number of chars before cursor position (not in Visual mode) cursor_words Number of words before cursor position (not in Visual mode) visual_bytes Number of bytes visually selected (only in Visual mode) visual_chars Number of chars visually selected (only in Visual mode) visual_words Number of words visually selected (only in Visual mode) *writefile()* writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}]) When {object} is a |List| write it to file {fname}. Each list item is separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String or Number. All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character. Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list} to writefile(). When {object} is a |Blob| write the bytes to file {fname} unmodified, also when binary mode is not specified. {flags} must be a String. These characters are recognized: 'b' Binary mode is used: There will not be a NL after the last list item. An empty item at the end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL. 'a' Append mode is used, lines are appended to the file: > :call writefile(["foo"], "event.log", "a") :call writefile(["bar"], "event.log", "a") < 'D' Delete the file when the current function ends. This works like: > :defer delete({fname}) < Fails when not in a function. Also see |:defer|. 's' fsync() is called after writing the file. This flushes the file to disk, if possible. This takes more time but avoids losing the file if the system crashes. 'S' fsync() is not called, even when 'fsync' is set. When {flags} does not contain "S" or "s" then fsync() is called if the 'fsync' option is set. An existing file is overwritten, if possible. When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an error message if the file can't be created or when writing fails. Also see |readfile()|. To copy a file byte for byte: > :let fl = readfile("foo", "b") :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b") < Can also be used as a |method|: > GetText()->writefile("thefile") xor({expr}, {expr}) *xor()* Bitwise XOR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Also see `and()` and `or()`. Example: > :let bits = xor(bits, 0x80) < Can also be used as a |method|: > :let bits = bits->xor(0x80) < ============================================================================== 3. Feature list *feature-list* There are three types of features: 1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: > :if has("cindent") < *gui_running* 2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met. Example: > :if has("gui_running") < *has-patch* 3. Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific patch. The "patch-7.4.248" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 248 was included. Example: > :if has("patch-7.4.248") < Note that it's possible for patch 248 to be omitted even though 249 is included. Only happens when cherry-picking patches. Note that this form only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that you need to check for the patch and the v:version. Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): > :if v:version > 602 || (v:version == 602 && has("patch148")) Hint: To find out if Vim supports backslashes in a file name (MS-Windows), use: `if exists('+shellslash')` acl Compiled with |ACL| support. all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled. (always true) amiga Amiga version of Vim. arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|. arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga). autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. (always true) autochdir Compiled with support for 'autochdir' autoservername Automatically enable |clientserver| balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support. balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons. beos BeOS version of Vim. browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will work. browsefilter Compiled with support for |browsefilter|. bsd Compiled on an OS in the BSD family (excluding macOS). builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals. (always true) byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline' channel Compiled with support for |channel| and |job| cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support. (always true) clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|. clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support. clipboard_working Compiled with 'clipboard' support and it can be used. cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support. cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support. cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support. comments Compiled with |'comments'| support. compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible. conpty Platform where |ConPTY| can be used. cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|. cscope Compiled with |cscope| support. cursorbind Compiled with |'cursorbind'| (always true) debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined. dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support. dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support. diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support. digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs. directx Compiled with support for DirectX and 'renderoptions'. dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|. drop_file Compiled with |drop_file| support. ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set. emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags. eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always true, of course! ex_extra |+ex_extra| (always true) extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and |'hlsearch'| farsi Support for Farsi was removed |farsi|. file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>| (always true) filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell read/write/filter commands find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches |+find_in_path|. float Compiled with support for |Float|. fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga and MS-Windows this is not present). folding Compiled with |folding| support. footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer| fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system(). gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang| gui Compiled with GUI enabled. gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI (always false). gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined). gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version). gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). gui_gtk3 Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). gui_haiku Compiled with Haiku GUI. gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI. gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI. gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI. gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon. gui_win32 Compiled with MS-Windows Win32 GUI. gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1) haiku Haiku version of Vim. hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul| hpux HP-UX version of Vim. iconv Can use iconv() for conversion. insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in Insert mode. (always true) job Compiled with support for |channel| and |job| ipv6 Compiled with support for IPv6 networking in |channel|. jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support. (always true) keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support. lambda Compiled with |lambda| support. langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support. libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support. linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and 'breakindent' support. linux Linux version of Vim. lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting. (always true) listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files| and the argument list |arglist|. localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local| lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|. mac Any Macintosh version of Vim cf. osx macunix Synonym for osxdarwin menu Compiled with support for |:menu|. mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|. modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers| (always true) mouse Compiled with support for mouse. mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse. mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse) mouse_gpm_enabled GPM mouse is working mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse. mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse. mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse) mouse_sgr Compiled with support for sgr mouse. mouse_urxvt Compiled with support for urxvt mouse. mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse. mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'. multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding' (always true) multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multibyte encoding. multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method. multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages. mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|. nanotime Compiled with sub-second time stamp checks. netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected. netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|. num64 Compiled with 64-bit |Number| support. (always true) ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32. osx Compiled for macOS cf. mac osxdarwin Compiled for macOS, with |mac-darwin-feature| packages Compiled with |packages| support. path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags' perl Compiled with Perl interface. persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history. postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing. printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support. profile Compiled with |:profile| support. prof_nsec Profile results are in nanoseconds. python Python 2.x interface available. |has-python| python_compiled Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python| python_dynamic Python 2.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python| python3 Python 3.x interface available. |has-python| python3_compiled Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python| python3_dynamic Python 3.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python| python3_stable Python 3.x interface is using Python Stable ABI. |has-python| pythonx Python 2.x and/or 3.x interface available. |python_x| qnx QNX version of Vim. quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support. reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support. rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support. ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|. scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. (always true) showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support. signs Compiled with |:sign| support. smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support. (always true) sodium Compiled with libsodium for better crypt support sound Compiled with sound support, e.g. `sound_playevent()` spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|. startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support. statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat' and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'. sun SunOS version of Vim. sun_workshop Support for Sun |workshop| has been removed. syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|. syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the current buffer. system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec(). tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files |tag-binary-search|. (always true) tag_old_static Support for old static tags was removed, see |tag-old-static|. tcl Compiled with Tcl interface. termguicolors Compiled with true color in terminal support. terminal Compiled with |terminal| support. terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap. termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|. textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|. textprop Compiled with support for |text-properties|. tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap or terminfo file. timers Compiled with |timer_start()| support. title Compiled with window title support |'title'|. (always true) toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|. ttyin input is a terminal (tty) ttyout output is a terminal (tty) unix Unix version of Vim. *+unix* unnamedplus Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard' user_commands User-defined commands. (always true) vartabs Compiled with variable tabstop support |'vartabstop'|. vcon Win32: Virtual console support is working, can use 'termguicolors'. Also see |+vtp|. vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|. (always true) vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup| *vim_starting* vim9script Compiled with |Vim9| script support viminfo Compiled with viminfo support. vimscript-1 Compiled Vim script version 1 support vimscript-2 Compiled Vim script version 2 support vimscript-3 Compiled Vim script version 3 support vimscript-4 Compiled Vim script version 4 support virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. (always true) visual Compiled with Visual mode. (always true) visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. (always true) |blockwise-operators|. vms VMS version of Vim. vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. (always true) vtp Compiled for vcon support |+vtp| (check vcon to find out if it works in the current console). wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option. wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option. win16 old version for MS-Windows 3.1 (always false) win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or 64 bits) win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin) win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit). win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME (always false) winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option. windows Compiled with support for more than one window. (always true) writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on. xattr Compiled with extended attributes support |xattr| (currently only supported on Linux). xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|. xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|. xpm Compiled with pixmap support. xpm_w32 Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. (Only for backward compatibility. Use "xpm" instead.) xsmp Compiled with X session management support. xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support. xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard. xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the xterm screen. x11 Compiled with X11 support. ============================================================================== 4. Matching a pattern in a String *string-match* This is common between several functions. A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in the buffer lines. When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost everything works in the same way. The difference is that a String is handled like it is one line. When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a line break for the pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or with ".". Example: > :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx" :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..") aa xx :echo matchstr(a, "a.x") a x Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and "$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a "\n". vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:
Save File
Cancel